Panasonic Fax Machine DX 800 User Manual

Facsimile  
Operating Instructions  
(For Internet Fax)  
Model No.  
DX-800  
Before operating this equipment, please read these instructions completely and keep these operating instructions for future reference.  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Getting to Know Your Machine  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
I Operating Your Machine with the Access Code  
I Operating Your Machine with the Access Code  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Index................................................................................................................................ 254  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GSetatingfteo Ktnoyw YIounr Mfaochirnemation  
denotes a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death.  
!
WARNING  
• TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR ANY TYPE OF  
MOISTURE.  
• TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF SHOCK OR DAMAGE TO THE MACHINE, IT MUST BE PROPERLY  
GROUNDED.  
• THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER. ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD ATTEMPT TO  
SERVICE THIS DEVICE DUE TO POSSIBLE EYE INJURY.  
CAUTION - USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER  
THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION  
EXPOSURE.  
• THE POWER CORD ON THIS EQUIPMENT MUST BE USED TO DISCONNECT THE MAIN POWER.  
PLEASE ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET OUTLET IS NEAR THE EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY  
ACCESSIBLE.  
• MAKE SURE THAT THE MACHINE IS INSTALLED IN A SPACIOUS OR WELL VENTILATED ROOM SO  
AS NOT TO INCREASE THE AMOUNT OF OZONE IN THE AIR. SINCE OZONE IS HEAVIER THAN AIR,  
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT AIR AT FLOOR LEVEL BE VENTILATED.  
Product complies with DHHS Rules 21  
CFR Subchapter J in effect at date  
of manufacture.  
Manufacturer's name and address  
Factory ID  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information  
denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.  
CAUTION  
!
• TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SHOCK OR FIRE, USE ONLY NO. 26 AWG OR LARGER TELEPHONE LINE  
CABLE.  
• DISCONNECT ALL POWER TO THE MACHINE BEFORE COVER(S) ARE REMOVED. REPLACE THE  
COVER(S) BEFORE THE UNIT IS RE-ENERGIZED.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
!
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk  
of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:  
• DO NOT USE THIS PRODUCT NEAR WATER, FOR EXAMPLE, NEAR A BATH TUB, WASH BOWL,  
KITCHEN SINK OR LAUNDRY TUB, IN A WET BASEMENT OR NEAR A SWIMMING POOL.  
• AVOID USING A TELEPHONE (OTHER THAN A CORDLESS TYPE) DURING AN ELECTRICAL STORM.  
THERE MAY BE A REMOTE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK FROM LIGHTNING.  
• DO NOT USE THE TELEPHONE TO REPORT A GAS LEAK IN THE VICINITY OF THE LEAK.  
• USE ONLY THE POWER CORD INDICATED IN THIS MANUAL.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precaution  
denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.  
CAUTION  
!
Do not install the machine near heating or an air conditioning unit.  
Avoid exposure to direct sunlight.  
Install the machine on a flat surface, leave at least 4 inches (10 cm) of space  
between the machine and other objects.  
Do not block the ventilation openings.  
Do not place heavy objects or spill liquids on the machine.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Function Key  
Any function can be started by first pressing  
and then enter the function number, or by  
FUNCTION  
pressing  
or  
scroll key repeatedly until the desired function appears on the display.  
Deferred Communication  
1 = XMT  
1
2 = Polling  
Advanced Communication  
1 = Not Used  
2
2 = Confidential Communication  
3 - 4 = Not Used  
5 = LAN Relay XMT  
Polling  
1 = Polling  
2 = Polled  
3
Print List  
1 = Journal (Print/View)  
6
2 = One-Touch/Abbreviated/Directory Search List  
3 = Program List  
4 = Fax Parameter List  
5 = Not Used  
6 = Individual XMT Journal  
7 = Directory Sheet  
Set Mode  
1 = User Parameters  
• Date & Time  
7
• Time Zone  
• Logo  
• Character ID  
• ID Number (Fax Telephone Number)  
• IP Address  
(This is a partial list, for additional  
Functions, see page 49)  
2 = One-Touch/Abbreviated Numbers  
3 = Program Keys  
4 = Fax Parameters  
5 - 7 = Not Used  
8 = Maintenance  
• Cleaning Printer Roller  
Toner Order Form  
Select Mode  
8
9
1 = Communication Journal = OFF/ON/INC  
2 = Delivery Notice = OFF/ON  
3 = Cover Sheet = OFF/ON  
4 = Password-XMT = OFF/ON  
5 = RCV to Memory = OFF/ON  
6 = XMT File Format = TIFF/PDF  
7 - 8 = Not Used  
9 = Memory XMT = OFF/ON  
Edit File Mode  
1 = File List (Print/View)  
2 = Change Time/Station  
3 = Delete File  
4 = Print File  
5 = Add Document  
6 = Retry Incomplete File  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
External View  
Document Sub Tray  
Recording Paper Tray  
ADF Door  
Recording Paper  
Sub Tray  
Printer Cover  
Control Panel  
Handset  
(Available as an  
option, see page 242)  
Document Return Tray  
(Set on the upper  
Recording Paper  
Cassette)  
Recording Paper Cassette  
(Standard)  
250-sheet Recording Paper Cassette  
(Available as an option, see page 242)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Control Panel  
- Used to enter a pause when recording or  
Keypad  
dialing a telephone number, or to redial  
the last dialed number.  
- Used to start Abbreviated Dialing.  
(See pages 94, 109 and 114)  
- Used for manual number dialing,  
recording phone numbers, and  
numerical entries.  
Tone Key  
- Used to temporarily change the  
dialing mode to Tone when Pulse  
mode is set. As a convenience it  
can also be used to enter a  
period "." while entering IP  
Address information.  
- Used to separate the Sub-Address from  
the telephone number when dialing, or to  
access some features of your PBX.  
- Used to start On-Hook Dialing. (See page 117)  
DX-800  
DX-800  
- Used to switch the machine into energy saving mode. (See page 81)  
- Used to set Normal, Lighter or Darker. (See page 86)  
- Used to set Standard, Fine, Super-Fine, Halftone (Fine) or  
Halftone (S-Fine). (See page 88)  
- Used to turn the verification stamp On or OFF.  
Lights when the verification stamp is set to ON.  
- Blinks when the machine is transmitting a document or receiving.  
- Lights when trouble occurs.  
- Used to select Email communication (Internet Fax).  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Control Panel  
- Press this button when you want to  
stop the communication, registration  
operation, or audible tone.  
Used for the following:  
- Used to make copies and set  
operations. (See page 136)  
- Start or select a function.  
- Search for a station name.  
(See pages 15, 109 and 115)  
- Adjust the monitor and ringer volumes.  
(See page 43)  
- Move the cursor while entering numbers  
and characters.  
- Used to reset all the previously  
set functions.  
- Used to correct entered numbers  
or characters (Backspace).  
- Search the station name for Directory  
Search Dialing.  
- Confirm the entered station for multi-station  
communication.  
- Confirm the current communication modes  
(e.g. Page number, ID, Dialed Telephone  
number, File number) when the unit is ON LINE.  
DX-800  
DX-800  
One-Touch Keys (01-28)  
- Used for One-Touch Dialing. (See pages 93, 110 and 111)  
Program Keys (P1-P4)  
- Used to record long dialing procedures or Group Dialing Number keys. (See pages 142 to 149)  
Character Keys  
- The One-Touch Keys and Program Keys serve as character and symbol input keys which are  
used to record your LOGO, character ID and station name.  
- Used to enter a symbol for the LOGO, character ID, station name and for the email address.  
Use  
or  
to select the desired symbol(s).  
- Used to insert a space while entering LOGO, character ID, station name and email address.  
- Used to switch between upper and lower character set.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pre Installation Information  
Before setting up your Panasonic machine on your network, please read this entire section to be familiar  
with its functions.  
Your machine is able to perform the following when connected to a 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet LAN  
(local area network):  
• Send paper-based information as an Internet Email.  
• Send Internet fax message (Direct IFAX XMT).  
• Receive and print an Internet Email automatically.  
• Forward received G3 fax message or Email automatically to the preprogrammed Email address or regular  
G3 fax machine (see "Fax Forward" on page 177).  
• Route received G3 fax message automatically to the sender-specified Email address or G3 fax machine  
using ITU-T SUB-Address (see "Inbound Routing" on pages 156 to 159).  
• Route received G3 fax messages automatically to the preprogrammed Email address or G3 fax machine  
using the sender’s fax ID code (see "Inbound Routing" on pages 156 to 159).  
• Relay an Internet Email to a G3 fax machine via regular fax transmission (see "Relayed Transmission" on  
• Network scanning and printing.  
To utilize the above functions, your machine needs to be set up properly on your network. Please contact  
your network administrator for actual network setup.  
Copy the Pre-installation Information form found at the end of this section on page 19, record the MAC  
Address on the form and ask your network administrator to complete the remaining information on the form.  
The MAC Address of your machine can be found in the Fax Parameter List printout (press  
).  
SET  
FUNCTION 6 4  
Your machine can be set up as either SMTP mail server or POP3 client. Dependent on the type of setup,  
different functions are available as follows.  
Function  
SMTP Server Setup POP3 Client Setup  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Sending paper-based information as an Internet Email  
Sending and Receiving the Internet fax message with Direct  
SMTP protocol.  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Receive and print an Internet Email automatically  
Receive and print an Internet Email manually  
Forward received G3 fax message or Email automatically  
Route received G3 fax message automatically  
Relay an Internet Email to G3 fax machine  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
1. To function as SMTP mail server, your machine's email address must include its unique Host  
name within your company domain. This unique Host name must be registered within your  
network’s DNS (Domain Name System) server. Example: [email protected]  
2. Automatically refers to immediate SMTP transfer or immediate POP3 retrieval. Manually  
refers to manual retrieval of mail when configured as POP3 client.  
NOTE  
3. If you are using DHCP to acquire the network parameters, contact your Network Administrator  
to reserve the obtained IP Address printed on the Fax Parameter List.  
4. Your machine will receive, print, forward or relay emails in text message format and TIFF-F  
image file attachment only.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Pre Installation Information  
Setup as SMTP Mail Server  
To install your machine as SMTP mail server, the following network parameters need to be programmed on  
your network and on your machine.  
• IP Address of the DNS Server (if not available, see Note 2)  
• IP Address of your machine  
• Subnet Mask of your machine  
• Name or IP Address of the Default SMTP mail server  
• IP Address of the Default Gateway  
• Email Address of your machine (see Note 1)  
• Host Name  
• SMTP Authentication Name (when authentication with the SMTP server is required)  
• SMTP Authentication Password (when authentication with the SMTP server is required)  
Email (from your machine to a PC) and Direct IFAX XMT Transmission  
SMTP01.panasonic.com  
(SMTP Mail Server)  
Direct IFAX XMT  
Router(Gateway)  
SMTP  
POP02.panasonic.com  
POP3  
(POP Server)  
Email (from a PC to your machine) and Direct IFAX XMT Reception  
SMTP01.panasonic.com  
(SMTP Mail Server)  
Direct IFAX XMT  
Router(Gateway)  
SMTP  
1. To function as SMTP mail server, your machine's email address must include its unique Host  
name within your company domain. This unique Host name must be registered within your  
network’s DNS (Domain Name System) server. Example: [email protected]  
2. By default the machine requires the IP Address of the DNS Server and prompts you to enter  
the SMTP Server Name. If the DNS Server is not available, change the Fax Parameter No.  
161 (DNS SERVER) to "1:Invalid". Then the machine will prompt you to enter the IP Address  
of the SMTP Server.  
NOTE  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Pre Installation Information  
Setup as POP3 Client  
To install your machine as POP3 Client, the following network parameters need to be programmed on your  
network.  
• IP Address of the DNS Server (if not available, see Note 2)  
• IP Address of your machine  
• Subnet Mask of your machine  
• Name or IP Address of the Default SMTP mail server  
• IP Address of the Default Gateway  
• POP Server Name or IP Address  
• POP User Account Name  
• POP Password  
• Email Address of your machine (see Note 1)  
Email Transmission (from your machine to a PC)  
SMTP01.panasonic.com  
(SMTP Mail Server)  
Router(Gateway)  
SMTP  
POP02.panasonic.com  
POP3  
(POP Server)  
Email reception (from a PC to your machine)  
SMTP01.panasonic.com  
(SMTP Mail Server)  
Router(Gateway)  
SMTP  
POP02.panasonic.com  
POP3  
(POP Server)  
1. The email address format can be the same as your regular email address. If your email  
address is [email protected], your machine's email address can be  
NOTE  
2. By default the machine requires the IP Address of the DNS Server and prompts you to enter  
the SMTP and POP Server Names. If the DNS Server is not available, change the Fax  
Parameter No. 161 (DNS SERVER) to "1:Invalid". Then the machine will prompt you to enter  
the IP Address of the SMTP and POP Servers.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Pre Installation Information  
For the total system to work properly via LAN, certain information and additional parameters must be set.  
Please contact your network administrator for the required information and connection to the LAN.  
Important: Make a copy of this page and ask the Network Administrator to complete the required  
information. After its returned, transfer the information to the back side of the front cover of this  
manual for future reference and troubleshooting.  
User Information  
Company Name  
Address  
Dept.  
City  
State  
Zip Code  
Tel. No.  
Fax No.  
Internet Parameters (See page 49)  
(1) IP Address:  
(2) Subnet Mask:  
(3) Default Gateway IP Address:  
(4) Primary DNS IP Address:  
(5) Secondary DNS IP Address:  
(6) Email Address:  
(7) SMTP Server IP Name :  
(8) POP Server Name:  
(9) POP User Name:  
or  
or  
*SMTP Server IP Address:  
*POP Server IP Address:  
(10) POP Password:  
(11) LDAP Server Name:  
(12) LDAP Log In Name:  
(13) LDAP Password:  
(14) LDAP Search Base:  
(15) Host Name:  
or  
LDAP Server IP Address  
(16) Default Subject:  
(17) Default Domain:  
(18) Selectable Domains:  
1.  
6.  
2.  
7.  
3.  
8.  
4.  
9.  
5.  
10.  
(19) Remote Password:  
(20) Relay XMT Password:  
(21) Manager’s Email Address:  
(22) Relay Domains (Domains Authorized for Relay Transmission):  
1.  
6.  
2.  
7.  
3.  
8.  
4.  
9.  
5.  
10.  
(23) Community Name (1):  
(24) Community Name (2):  
(25) Device Name:  
(26) Device Location:  
1. Items in Bold, depict information obtained from you Network Administrator.  
NOTE  
2. By default the machine requires the IP Address of the DNS Server and prompts you to enter  
the SMTP and POP Server Names (items 3 and 7 above). If the DNS Server is not available,  
change the Fax Parameter No. 161 (DNS SERVER) to "1:Invalid". Then the machine will  
prompt you to enter the IP Address of the SMTP and POP Servers.  
3. If required, the MAC Address of your machine can be obtained from the Fax Parameter List  
printout, by pressing  
.
SET  
FUNCTION 6 4  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Pre Installation Information  
Explanation of Contents  
MAC Address  
: MAC Address of your machine can be found in the Fax Parameter  
List printout (press ).  
SET  
FUNCTION 6 4  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
IP Address  
: The Internet Protocol (IP) address assigned to your machine.  
: The Subnet Mask number.  
Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway IP Address  
Primary DNS Server IP Address  
Secondary DNS Server IP Address  
Email Address  
: The Default Gateway's IP Address.  
: The IP address of the Primary DNS Server.  
: The second IP address of the Primary DNS Server.  
: The email address assigned to your machine. (Up to 60 characters)  
SMTP Server Name or SMTP Server IP : The SMTP Server Name (up to 60 characters). The SMTP Server  
Address  
IP Address.  
(8)  
(9)  
POP Server Name or POP Server IP  
Address  
: The POP Server Name. (Up to 60 characters) The POP Server IP  
Address.  
POP User Name  
: POP User Name. (Up to 40 characters)  
: POP Password. (Up to 10 characters)  
(10) POP Password  
(11) LDAP Server Name  
(12) LDAP Log In Name  
(13) LDAP Password  
(14) LDAP Search Base  
(15) Default Subject  
: The LDAP Server Name or IP Address. (Up to 60 characters)  
: LDAP Login Name. (Up to 40 characters)  
: LDAP Password. (Up to 10 characters)  
: LDAP Search Base. (Up to 60 characters)  
: The information to be added to the Subject Line for all outgoing  
emails. (Up to 40 characters)  
(16) Default Domain  
: Specify the Domain Name (up to 50 characters) to be added to  
frequently used or incomplete outgoing email addresses (i.e.  
@yourcompany.com).  
(17) Host Name  
: The name assigned to your machine. (Up to 60 characters)  
(18) Selectable Domains  
: Enter up to 10 Domain Names that can be selected during manual  
email addressing. (Up to 30 characters)  
(19) Remote Password  
: Enter a security password (up to 10 characters) to allow Remote  
Programming of the Internet Parameters and Auto Dialer or the  
retrieval of the Journal via email.  
(20) Relay XMT Password  
: Enter a password to provide network security to your Relay Station  
(for G3 relay purposes). (Up to 10 characters)  
(21) Manager’s Email Address  
: Enter you Department Manager’s email address for notification of all  
Internet relayed transmissions for supervision and cost control  
purposes. (Up to 60 characters)  
(22) Relay Domain (01 to 10)  
: Enter up to 10 Domain Names that are authorized to access your  
Internet Fax for Relayed Transmission Request. (Up to 30  
characters)  
(23) Community Name (1)  
(24) Community Name (2)  
(25) Device Name  
: Community Name used for the Network Device Locator. (Up to 32  
characters).  
: Community Name used for the Network Device Locator. (Up to 32  
characters).  
: Device Name used for the Network Device Locator. (Up to 32  
characters).  
(26) Device Location  
: Device Location for the Network Device Locator. (Up to 32  
characters).  
1. All IP Addresses consist of 4 parts separated by periods "." (i.e. 165.113.245.2). For your  
convenience, you can use the TONE key to enter a period "." while entering the IP Address  
information.  
NOTE  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Internet Communication Features  
Internet Fax Transmission  
Your machine allows you to transmit documents over the Internet to another Internet Fax or a PC. The  
document is first scanned and converted into a TIFF-F or PDF* file, and then transmitted to the remote  
location as an attachment file to an email using MIME encoding.  
Note: PDF file is only available if sending the document(s) to a PC.  
The email system at the receiving end must support MIME. Otherwise, the attachment file will be detached  
and lost.  
When you send an email message to someone, your machine uses Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)  
to transfer your outgoing mail to your SMTP mail server, which in turn uses SMTP to send your mail to the  
Internet.  
Internet Fax Delivery Notice (MDN)  
If the sender (Internet Fax) desires a processing confirmation, it must request a Message Disposition  
Notification when sending the message itself to a device supporting this notification function.  
Several email applications such as Eudora and Outlook Express support and are able to respond to the  
delivery confirmation notification sent from the Internet Fax. As well as send a request for notification to the  
Internet Fax by email applications that support MDN (Message Disposition Notification) function.  
For additional details on MDN, consult a suitable reference such as the Help file and the User's Guide of  
each respective email application.  
Internet Fax Transmission  
Message Delivery Notification (MDN)  
response Capability Notification  
Internet Fax  
Internet Fax  
PC  
PC  
Eudora, Outlook Express, etc.  
Eudora, Outlook Express, etc.  
Legend :  
: MDN Request from the Originator  
: MDN Response with Capability Notification from the Recepient  
: MDN Response from the Recipient  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Internet Communication Features  
Direct SMTP (Direct IFAX XMT)  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is used to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. An important feature of  
SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as SMTP mail relay by  
employing SMTP server.  
Direct SMTP allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly without using an SMTP  
server. For this feature to work reliably, the IP Address should remain unchanged (ask your Network  
Administrator to reserve the IP Address). The Domain Name of the machines and other record information  
must be properly registered in the DNS server.  
Further more, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the  
corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely unwilling to open the firewall for  
other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats.  
This makes Direct SMTP attractive because it can operate throughout the organization's Intranet.  
Capability exchanges and content negotiations are also available to take advantageous communication  
between Internet Fax communications.  
LAN  
Direct SMTP  
Capability Exchange  
Typical SMTP  
Internet Fax  
Internet Fax  
routing  
SMTP Server  
Internet  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Internet Communication Features  
Internet Mail Reception  
Your machine allows you to receive and print a PC transmitted email automatically or manually, depending  
on its setup configuration. However, if the received email includes a file attachment in a format other than  
TIFF-F, such as PDF, Word, Excel, Power Point, your machine prints an error message instead.  
Internet Fax  
LAN  
LAN  
Internet Fax  
InternetFax  
Transmission  
Internet  
InternetMail  
Reception  
PC  
PC  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Internet Communication Features  
Inbound Routing  
Using the Inbound Routing feature, your machine can route documents received from a G3 fax machine to  
email address(s) or to Internet Fax machine(s) connected to a LAN as an email, as well as to other G3 fax  
machine(s) over the telephone line.  
When an incoming Internet Fax, email or a regular fax document is received, your machine, checks for the  
following:  
1. First, your machine checks whether a sub-address is included. If it is, it will look for a sub-address match  
within its auto dialer and will route the documents to the corresponding stations email address(s) and/or  
fax telephone number(s).  
2. If no sub-address is specified, then your machine tries to match the originating fax machine’s Numeric ID  
(TSI) with the TSI routing information within its auto dialer and will route the documents to the  
corresponding stations email address(s) and/or fax telephone number(s).  
InternetFax  
LAN  
Email  
Fax Reception  
InternetFax  
G3 Fax  
Transfer to  
a G3 Fax  
PC  
G3 Fax  
1. If the originating fax machine does not support the above sub-address function, sub-address  
destination(s) cannot be selected.  
NOTE  
2. Your machine will allow you to register the same sub-address number for an email address  
and a telephone number. It will also allow you to "tag" multiple email addresses and/or fax  
telephone numbers for routing.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Internet Communication Features  
Fax Forward  
Your machine is capable of transferring all received Internet email or regular G3 fax documents to a pre-  
programmed G3 fax or a PC destination.  
InternetFax  
LAN  
Transfer to a G3 Fax  
G3 Fax  
or  
Email  
Transfer to a PC  
PC  
G3 Fax  
Network Scanner  
Your machine can be utilized as a network scanner by simply transmitting an image to a PC as TIFF-F or  
PDF attachment to an email.  
This feature was enhanced with an addition of a new Fax Parameter No. 164 (IFAX XMT HEADER), giving  
you a selection of whether to include the header when sending a document to an address in the same  
Domain as specified in the Default Domain parameter. (See Note 1)  
LAN  
Internet Fax  
PC  
PC  
1. When sending to a Domain other than as specified in the Default Domain parameter, the  
NOTE  
header will be included regardless of the selection.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Internet Communication Features  
Network Printer  
Your machine can be utilized as a network printer by simply sending the documents created on your PC  
using various software applications to your machine via TCP/IP protocol.  
There a two parts to setting up your machine as a network printer. Part 1 requires you to download the  
software (printer driver and LPR) from the web site listed below or install the software from the CD-ROM  
included with the machine.  
The second part requires you to install and configure the software on your PC to work with your machine,  
(See the web site for details about the printer driver installation and operation.)  
You can download the Panasonic’s printer driver and LPR monitor from any of the following URL addresses:  
http://panasonic.co.jp/pcc/en/  
LAN  
InternetFax  
Print  
PC  
1. The IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway IP Address (TCP/IP Gateway Address)  
NOTE  
must be programmed on your machine to use as a Network Printer.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Internet Communication Features  
Relayed Transmission  
Your machine allows you to transmit an email received from an Internet Fax or PC connected to the LAN to  
multiple fax machines via a telephone line. You can attach files with the TIFF-F format to this email.  
Using the Sub-address specified by the originating fax machine, your machine can then route the received  
documents to the remote machine via an email, which can then relay these documents to final destinations  
where the final recipient is a regular G3 fax machine.  
Your machine also allows you to convert a data file from various application programs such as spreadsheet  
into a TIFF-F format file and then transmit this file attached to an email.  
To convert applications into a TIFF-F formatted file, however, requires you to first download the software  
(TIFF Converter and MAPI Mail Linking program) from the web site listed below or install the software from  
the CD-ROM included with the machine. (Saved under the English\Extra\Tiff Converter folder) The second  
part requires you to install the software on your PC.  
(See the web site for details about the software installation and operation.)  
You can download the Panasonic software from any of the following URL addresses:  
http://panasonic.co.jp/pcc/en/  
InternetFax  
Transfer to a G3 Fax  
LAN  
InternetFax  
G3 Fax  
Transfer to a G3 Fax  
G3 Fax  
Email  
Transfer to  
a G3 Fax  
PC  
G3 Fax  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Internet Communication Features  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)  
DHCP is a protocol for dynamically assigning IP addresses to Internet Fax and client PCs. With DHCP, an  
Internet Fax can automatically acquire a unique IP address each time it connects to a network making IP  
address management an easier task for network administrators. When an Internet Fax logs on to the  
network, the DHCP server (see Note) selects an IP address from a master list and assigns it to the system.  
If you wish to enable the following options on your Internet Fax, a static (reserved by a Network  
Administrator) IP address and configurations must be used instead of the DHCP operation.  
SMTP Receiving  
G3 Gateway  
Direct SMTP (Direct IFAX XMT)  
Note:  
If your machine fails to log onto the DHCP Server, the following message will display on the LCD:  
DHCP ERROR  
INFO. CODE=722  
DHCP NOT RESPONDING  
1:RETRY 2:DISABLE  
Pressing "1:RETRY":  
Will cause the machine to reboot and attempt to reconfigure the TCP/IP.  
If your machine still cannot log onto the DHCP Server, you will be required to program the Internet User  
Parameters yourself manually, or ask your network administrator to resolve the DHCP Server logon  
problem.  
Pressing "2:DISABLE":  
Changes the DHCP setting (Fax Parameter No. 169 - DHCP CLIENT) to "1:Invalid", requiring you to  
program the Internet User Parameters yourself manually.  
SMTP Authentication  
The Internet's emergence as a worldwide digital infrastructure has dramatically encouraged a market for  
communications-oriented appliances. However, the no object security technique has gained widespread  
and dominant use over the Internet due to several reasons.  
1. Internet mail is a multi-hop store and forward architecture, and use of channel-based security is  
generally difficult.  
2. No single technique is recommended by the Internet Fax standard.  
To improve and robust the system, Authentication through encryption based techniques are provided as a  
typical solution. The techniques may be associated with the transmission channel, such as by using Simple  
Authentication and Security layer (SASL).  
Some Internet Service Providers (ISP) take advantage of Internet mail service by providing an  
Authentication feature.  
Your Internet Fax provides the following three Authentication options.  
1. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP AUTH) -- while sending  
2. Lightweight challenge-response mechanism POP (APOP) -- while receiving  
3. POP before SMTP -- performs POP procedure prior to every SMTP transaction  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Internet Communication Features  
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)  
For convenience, your Internet Fax has an LDAP client feature to enable the search for recipient's email  
addresses from the LDAP server, which assists the entering of long email addresses.  
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a protocol for accessing online directory services. An  
LDAP client connects to an LDAP server and asks a question. The server responds with an answer.  
Your Internet Fax indicates the search result from the LDAP server on the LCD display. This enables you to  
easily choose the recipients you wish to send to and saves you time from entering long and intricate email  
addresses.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important Information  
Your machine uses the same communication protocols as email: the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).  
The differences from a standard G3 fax communication using the Public Telephone Network (PSTN) are as  
follows.  
Differences between Internet Fax and Regular Fax  
A regular Fax machine goes off-hook, dials, and the phone network completes a circuit over phone lines to  
the receiving fax. You pay for the circuit. The two faxes negotiate a connection, synchronize and exchange  
image data.  
The Internet Fax works like an email, the image data is broken down into packets and transmitted through  
your Local Area Network (LAN) to the Internet or Intranet instead of using a telephone company’s network,  
thus saving you long distance costs.  
Transmitted Document Confirmation  
1. Your machine does not directly connect to the final destination (see Note below), but rather connects to a  
Mail Server via LAN. Therefore, if a document cannot be correctly transmitted due to an error, the  
erroneous mail may be returned from the Mail Server to your machine.  
2. The erroneous mail may take a long time to return (20 to 30 minutes) depending on the destination  
location, traffic on the network or LAN system configuration.  
3. Depending on the Mail Server, it is also possible that erroneous mail is not returned at all. Therefore,  
when transmitting important or time sensitive documents, it is recommended that you follow up with a  
telephone call to confirm reception.  
4. Documents cannot be transmitted correctly if the destination Mail Server does not conform to the MIME  
protocol. Erroneous mail may not be returned depending on the Mail Server.  
Note:  
1) Fax Parameter 172 (DIRECT IFAX XMT), if set to "Valid," allows you to configure One-Touch/ABBR so  
that you can directly send to the destination without going through the Mail (SMTP) Server.  
2) Your machine supports the Delivery Notice feature (see page 102).  
Your machine Cannot Make a Phone Call via LAN  
Your machine can only make a phone call using a regular telephone line (PSTN).  
Dual Port Communication  
Your machine's dual port capability, allows simultaneous G3 Fax Communication over regular telephone line  
(PSTN) and LAN Communication.  
Transmission Resolution  
In view of PC transmission, the factory default setting for the resolution is set to FINE mode. If required, this  
setting can be changed to Normal.  
Internet Mail Reception  
1. Your machine can receive text email from a PC and print ANSI characters. It will print a "" symbol if an  
unrecognized character is received.  
2. Received email font and character size are fixed and cannot be changed.  
3. Text email will be printed at about 72 lines per page. It is recommended that you use A4/Letter size  
recording paper.  
4. If the received text email includes a file attachment in a format other than TIFF-F, such as PDF, Word,  
Excel, Power Point, your machine prints an error message instead.  
5. If the received email includes attached TIFF-F formatted image files, the text and TIFF-F formatted image  
file will be printed on separate pages.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important Information  
Sending a Document to a PC via LAN  
When transmitting a document to an email address, the following instructions are sent as text message in  
addition to the TIFF-F formatted image file.  
An Image data in TIFF-F format has been attached to this email. You can download the TIFF-F Image  
Viewer from the following URL addresses:  
http://panasonic.co.jp/pcc/en/  
Note: If the document(s) being sent are in the PDF format, the following message is shown instead.  
An image data in PDF format has been attached to this email.  
Internet Relayed Transmission  
To prevent unauthorized stations from accessing your Relay Station for Internet Relayed Transmission, you  
must set up your Network security. Enter a Relay Station Name, which is concealed from the final  
destinations and a Manager’s Email Address for notification of all Internet Relayed Transmissions.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMnstaallinignYourUManchiniet and Accessories  
Unpack the carton and check that you have all the accessories illustrated.  
Toner Cartridge  
Recording Paper Tray  
Machine  
Operating Instructions  
Telephone Line Cable  
Power Cord  
CD-ROM  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing the Accessories  
Final Installed View  
Recording Paper Tray  
Hook the projections into the square  
holes on the machine.  
Handset  
[Available as an Option]  
Handset Cord  
Handset Cradle [Available as an Option]  
[Available as an Option]  
Hook the projections into the square holes on the machine.  
Connect the cable into the HANDSET jack on the machine.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing the Toner Cartridge  
Unpack the Toner Cartridge and rock it back  
1
2
3
and forth as shown 5 or 6 times to even the  
toner inside.  
TonerCartridge  
Remove the protective seal.  
Note: Pull the seal slowly and straight out.  
Open the Printer Cover.  
Printer Cover  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing the Toner Cartridge  
Align the projections on both sides of the  
Toner Cartridge with the grooves in the  
machine as shown and insert the Toner  
Cartridge into the machine.  
4
5
6
Note: Lock the Toner Cartridge into place by  
pressing the handle down and then  
pushing towards the rear of the  
machine.  
Close the Printer Cover.  
Printer Cover  
If you are replacing the Toner Cartridge, it is  
recommended to clean the Printer Roller to  
maintain good printing quality. To clean the  
Printer Roller, follow the procedure on page  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading the Recording Paper  
How to Load the Recording Paper  
Paper Specifications  
In general, most bond papers will produce excellent results. Most photocopy papers will also work very well.  
There are many "name" and "generic" brands of paper available. We recommend that you test various  
papers until you obtain the results you are looking for. For detailed recommended paper specifications,  
How to Load the Recording Paper  
Lift up the Paper Cassette slightly and slide it  
1
out from the machine.  
Paper Cassette  
Remove the Paper Cassette Cover.  
2
Cassette Cover  
1. Remove the Shipping Screw securing  
3
the Pressure Plate.  
2. Store the screw by attaching it to the post  
provided under the Paper Cassette  
Cover for future use.  
Shipping Screw  
Cassette Cover  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Loading the Recording Paper  
How to Load the Recording Paper  
1. Load the paper into the Paper Cassette.  
Slide the paper width guide to the left  
until it lightly touches the stack of paper  
without bending the paper. The paper  
must fit squarely and firmly between the  
Paper Width Guide and the right side of  
the tray. If it does not, the paper may  
feed into the printer incorrectly resulting  
in a paper jam.  
4
Max. Paper  
Capacity Mark  
Caution: Make sure that the paper is set  
under the metal Paper  
Separation Clips and that it  
does not exceed the Maximum  
Paper Capacity Mark. You can  
load about 250 sheets (20 lb  
weight). For paper  
Paper  
Width Guide  
specification, see page 241.  
2. Re-install the Paper Cassette Cover.  
3. Slide the Paper Cassette into the  
machine.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the Paper Cassette for the Paper Length  
How to Adjust the Paper Cassette for the Paper Length  
The factory default Paper Length setting for the Paper Cassette is on Letter size. To change the paper  
length to A4 or Legal size, follow the steps below.  
1. Remove the paper from the Paper  
1
Cassette and place the cassette upside  
down on a flat surface.  
2. While pushing down on the release latch,  
pull out the Paper Length Guide.  
Release Latch  
3. Turn the Paper Cassette upright.  
4. Insert the Paper Length Guide hooks into  
the appropriate paper length slots (A4 or  
Legal) and slide the guide towards the  
back of the cassette until it locks in place.  
5. Load the paper into the Paper Cassette.  
Slide the paper width guide to the left  
until it lightly touches the stack of paper  
without bending the paper. The paper  
Paper Length Guide  
Paper Width Guide  
must fit squarely and firmly between the  
Paper Width Guide and the right side of  
the tray. If it does not, the paper may  
feed into the printer incorrectly resulting  
Max. Paper  
Capacity Mark  
in a paper jam.  
Caution: Make sure that the paper is set  
under the metal Paper  
Separation Clips and that it  
does not exceed the Maximum  
Paper Capacity Mark. You can  
load about 250 sheets (20 lb  
weight). For paper  
LTR  
specification, see page 241  
.
A4  
LGL  
6. Replace the Paper Cassette Cover to the  
appropriate paper position (LTR, A4 or  
LGL).  
7. Slide the Paper Cassette into the  
machine.  
The Recording Paper Size setting of the Fax  
Parameter No. 23 must match the paper  
loaded in the cassette. If you change the  
Recording Paper Size, please change the  
setting accordingly. (See page 80)  
2
1. If you forget to change the Recording Paper Size setting in Fax Parameter No. 23 when  
different paper is installed in the cassette, the unit will Stop printing after the 1st page of an  
Incoming Fax and display a "PAPER SIZE MISMATCH" error. Then, the Recording Paper  
Size setting automatically adjusts to the proper size and the unit resumes printing the Incoming  
Fax from the 1st page.  
NOTE  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting the Paper Cassette for the Paper Width  
How to Adjust the Paper Cassette for the Paper Width  
The factory default Paper Width setting for the Paper Cassette is on Letter/Legal size. To change the paper  
width to A4 size, follow the steps below.  
1. Release the left Paper Separation Clip  
1
latch.  
2. Pull up the Paper Separation Clip to  
remove it.  
3. Reposition the Paper Separation Clip  
into the A(A4) slot.  
Paper Separation Clip  
4. Swing the Paper Separation Clip  
downward to latch it in place.  
1. Load the paper into the Paper Cassette.  
Slide the paper width guide to the left  
until it lightly touches the stack of paper  
without bending the paper. The paper  
must fit squarely and firmly between the  
Paper Width Guide and the right side of  
the tray. If it does not, the paper may  
feed into the printer incorrectly resulting  
in a paper jam.  
2
Paper  
Width Guide  
Max. Paper  
Capacity Mark  
Caution: Make sure that the paper is set  
under the metal Paper  
Separation Clips and that it  
does not exceed the Maximum  
Paper Capacity Mark. You can  
load about 250 sheets (20 lb  
weight). For paper  
LTR  
A4  
specification, see page 241  
.
LGL  
2. Replace the Paper Cassette Cover to the  
appropriate paper position (LTR, A4 or  
LGL).  
3. Slide the Paper Cassette into the  
machine.  
The Recording Paper Size setting of the Fax  
Parameter No. 23 must match the paper  
loaded in the cassette. If you change the  
Recording Paper Size, please change the  
setting accordingly. (See page 80)  
3
1. If you forget to change the Recording Paper Size setting in Fax Parameter No. 23 when  
different paper is installed in the cassette, the unit will Stop printing after the 1st page of an  
Incoming Fax and display a "PAPER SIZE MISMATCH" error. Then, the Recording Paper  
Size setting automatically adjusts to the proper size and the unit resumes printing the Incoming  
Fax from the 1st page.  
NOTE  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting the LAN Cable, Telephone Line Cable and Power Cord  
I Power Cord  
Plug one end of the power cord into an ordinary 3 prong AC outlet and the other end into the receptacle on  
the rear of the machine.  
Note:  
1. Make sure that the LAN Cable is plugged into the RJ-45 LAN Jack before applying power to the machine.  
2. If the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is not available, an Information Code 722 will appear  
on the Display. Please refer to the Information Codes table on page 228 for additional information.  
Warning: This apparatus must be properly grounded through an ordinary 3 prong AC outlet.  
Do not break off the earth (ground) prong to fit a 2 prong outlet.  
Power Cord (Included)  
I Telephone Line Cable  
Plug one end of the telephone line cable into the "RJ-11C" telephone jack supplied by the telephone  
company and the other end into the LINE jack on the left side of the machine.  
RJ-11C Telephone Jack  
Telephone Line Cable (Included)  
I Ethernet LAN Cable  
Ethernet-Token-RingBridge  
(OptionalOrderNo. UE-204006)  
EthernetLAN(10Base-T/100Base-TX)  
10Base-T/100Base-TXEthernetHub  
Cable(Not included)  
1. Your machine uses little power and you should keep it ON at all times. If the power is turned  
OFF for too long, the clock contents may be lost.  
NOTE  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting the LAN Cable, Telephone Line Cable and Power Cord  
External Telephone (Optional)  
You can connect an additional standard  
single line telephone to the machine. To  
connect the telephone, break off the  
protective tab on the TEL jack.  
RJ-45LANJack  
(10Base-T/100Base-TX)  
LINKLamp  
IlluminateswhenconnectedtotheLAN. Lamp  
willnotturnONiftheLANCableisdefective  
(containsbreaks).  
ACTIVITYLamp  
BlinkswhenthereisdatatrafficontheLAN.  
LANCable  
(10Base-T/100Base-TXCable)  
Insertthepluguntilaclickisheard.  
(LANCableisnotincludedwiththeproduct.)  
PurchaseaCategory5Cable, compliantwith  
EIA/TIA568-A-5standard.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Dialing Method (Tone or Pulse)  
Your machine can operate with either of two dialing methods (Tone or Pulse), depending on the type of  
telephone line you are connected to. If you need to change the dialing method to Tone or Pulse, follow the  
procedure below.  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
4
06 DIALING METHOD  
2:TONE  
3
4
6
0
1
06 DIALING METHOD  
1:PULSE  
or  
for “PULSE”.  
for “TONE”.  
or  
06 DIALING METHOD  
2:TONE  
2
5
1. For some countries, this feature is not available depending on the country’s regulation. The  
display may not show this feature.  
NOTE  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adjusting the Volume  
You can adjust the monitor and ringer volume on your machine. The built-in speaker enables you to hear the  
dial tone, dialing signals, and busy tone. The ringer sounds when your machine receives a call.  
Setting the Monitor Volume  
* MONITOR *  
1
You will hear the dial tone through the speaker.  
MONITOR VOLUME  
2
LOW  
[❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚] HIGH  
repeatedly to raise the volume.  
repeatedly to lower the volume.  
or  
MONITOR VOLUME  
] HIGH  
LOW  
[
3
Setting the Ringer Volume  
MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00  
Standby  
00%  
1
2
RINGER VOLUME  
(((( ¤ ))))  
repeatedly to raise the volume.  
or  
RINGER VOLUME  
¤
repeatedly to lower the volume.  
3
1. You can also adjust the volume of the key touch tone and the volume of the buzzer in the Fax  
Parameter No. 10 (KEY/BUZZER VOLUME). (See page 79)  
NOTE  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
User Parameters  
General Description  
Your machine has several basic settings (User Parameters) to help you keep records of the documents you  
send or receive. For example, the built-in clock keeps the current date and time, and your LOGO and ID  
Number help to identify you when you send or receive documents.  
Setting the Date and Time  
In standby, the display will show the date and time. Once the date and time is set, it will automatically be  
updated.  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
3
7
1:USER PARAMETERS?  
PRESS SET TO SELECT  
1
DATE & TIME  
1-01-2002 00:00  
DATE & TIME  
10-12-2002 15:00  
Enter the new date and time.  
4
Ex:  
Month  
Date  
Year  
: October  
: 12th  
1 0  
1 2  
: 2002  
2 0 0 2  
1 5 0 0  
Time  
: 3:00 PM  
If you make a mistake, use  
or  
to move the cursor  
over the incorrect number, then overwrite it with a correct  
one.  
5
1. The clock of your machine is equipped with D.S.T.(Daylight Saving Time) system. So, your  
clock will automatically set the time forward from 2:00 AM to 3:00 AM on the first Sunday of  
April and set the time back from 2:00 AM to 1:00 AM on the last Sunday of October.  
If your state does not use the D.S.T. system, change the Fax Parameter No. 35 (DAYLIGHT  
TIME) to "Invalid". (See page 81)  
NOTE  
2. The current Date & Time must be set because it is required by the Telephone Consumer Act of  
1991. (For details, see FCC NOTICE at the end of these Operating Instructions)  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
User Parameters  
Setting Your LOGO  
When you send a document, your LOGO appears on the top of the copy printed out at the other station.  
The LOGO helps to identify you to someone who receives your document.  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
3
7
1:USER PARAMETERS?  
PRESS SET TO SELECT  
1
LOGO  
repeatedly until display shows;  
LOGO  
PANASONIC  
Enter your LOGO (max. 25 characters and digits) by using  
the Character keys.  
4
Ex:  
P A N A S O N I  
C
If you make a mistake, use  
or  
to move the cursor  
one space beyond the incorrect character, press  
then re-enter the new character.  
CLEAR  
If more than 19 characters are entered, the left side  
characters will scroll off the display.  
5
1. Your Company Name or your name must be set as your LOGO because it is required by the  
Telephone Consumer Act of 1991. (For details, see FCC NOTICE at the end of these  
Operating Instructions)  
NOTE  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Parameters  
Setting Your Character ID  
If the remote machine has a Character ID capabilities, when you are sending or receiving, your Character ID  
will appear on the remote machine's display and the remote machine's Character ID will appear on your  
display.  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
3
7
1:USER PARAMETERS?  
PRESS SET TO SELECT  
1
CHARACTER ID  
repeatedly until display shows;  
CHARACTER ID  
Enter your Character ID (max. 16 characters and digits)  
by using the Character keys.  
HEAD OFFICE  
4
5
Ex:  
H E A D SPACE O F F I C E  
If you make a mistake, use or to move the cursor  
then re-  
beyond the incorrect character, press  
enter the new character.  
CLEAR  
1. The special characters of Å, Ä, Ö, Ü, Æ, è and é cannot be used for Character ID.  
NOTE  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Parameters  
Setting Your ID Number (Fax Telephone Number)  
If the remote machine does not have a Character ID but it has an ID Number, when sending or receiving,  
your ID Number will appear on the remote machine's display and their ID Number will appear on your  
display.  
We suggest you use your facsimile telephone number as your ID number (max. 20 digits).  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
3
7
1:USER PARAMETERS?  
PRESS SET TO SELECT  
1
ID NO.  
repeatedly until display shows;  
ID NO.  
201 555 1212  
Enter your ID (max. 20 digits) by using the keypad and  
key to enter a space between numbers.  
4
5
SPACE  
Ex:  
2 0 1 SPACE 5 5 5 SPACE 1 2 1 2  
If you make a mistake, use or to move the cursor  
one space beyond the incorrect number, press  
then re-enter the new number.  
CLEAR  
NOTE  
1. You may use  
to enter a "+" character at the beginning of the ID number to indicate the  
following digit(s) for your country code.  
Ex : +1 201 555 1212 +1 for U.S.A. country code.  
+81 3 111 2345  
+81 for Japan country code.  
2. Your Fax Telephone Number must be set as your ID Number because it is required by the  
Telephone Consumer Act of 1991. (For details, see FCC NOTICE at the end of these  
Operating Instructions)  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the Internet Parameters  
Setting the User (Internet) Parameters  
Before starting, you will need a completed copy of page 19 (Pre Installation Information). For your machine  
to be able to operate on the Network properly, the following five (5) Basic Parameters must be pre-  
programmed into the machine.  
• IP Address  
• Subnet Mask  
• Default Gateway IP Address  
• SMTP Server Name or IP Address  
• Email Address  
Note: If DHCP server is available on your network, the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway  
IP Address will be acquired automatically.  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
3
7
1:USER PARAMETERS?  
PRESS SET TO SELECT  
1
IP ADDRESS  
repeatedly until display shows;  
IP ADDRESS  
Enter the IP Address using the keypad. Press  
to enter the period ".". (See Note 3)  
or  
123.178.240.3  
4
5
Ex:  
1 2 3  
1 7 8  
2 4 0  
3
SUBNET MASK  
To continue setting other parameters, or press  
to return to standby.  
STOP  
1. To scroll the display to desired User Parameter in Step 3, press  
2. If the DNS Server is not available, change the setting of the Fax Parameter No. 161 (DNS  
SERVER) to "Invalid", then enter the IP Address instead.  
or  
.
NOTE  
3. For convenience, you can use  
to enter a period "." while programming IP Addresses only.  
Otherwise is used to enter an asterisk under other conditions.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting the Internet Parameters  
Setting the User Parameters for the LAN Interface  
Depending on how your machine will be configured to communicate on the LAN, the appropriate  
parameters listed in the table below must be stored first. (See pages 16 to 20)  
Parameter  
DATE & TIME  
Comments  
1
2
Current Date and Time.  
The Time Zone is required as part of the Email header information when sending  
Internet faxes.  
TIME ZONE  
3
4
5
LOGO  
Up to 25 characters & digits.  
CHARACTER ID  
ID NO.  
Up to 16 characters & digits.  
Your Fax Telephone Number. (Up to 20 digits)  
Hardware Address hard-coded into your machine. (If required, can be obtained from  
the Fax Parameter List printout, by pressing [FUNCTION] [6] [4] [SET])  
6
(MAC ADDRESS)  
IP Address assigned to your machine by the Network Administrator or the DHCP  
Server.  
7* IP ADDRESS  
8* SUBNET MASK  
Subnet Mask assigned by the Network Administrator or the DHCP Server.  
DEFAULT GATEWAY IP  
ADDR  
Default Gateway IP Address assigned by the Network Administrator or the DHCP  
Server.  
9*  
IP Address of the primary DNS Server. If the DNS Server is not available, change the  
setting of the Fax Parameter No. 161 (DNS SERVER) to "Invalid", then enter the IP  
Address instead.  
PRIMARY DNS SERVER  
IP ADDRESS  
10*  
SECONDARY DNS  
11*  
IP Address of the secondary DNS Server.  
SERVER IP ADDRESS  
The Email Address assigned to your machine for sending and receiving. (Up to 60  
characters)  
12* EMAIL ADDRESS  
13* SMTP SERVER NAME  
The name of the SMTP Mail Server. (Up to 60 characters)  
14 SMTP SERVER IP ADDR IP Address of the SMTP Mail Server.  
User name required to login to the SMTP Server before it allow to send email  
messages. (Up to 40 characters).  
15* SMTP AUTH NAME  
16* SMTP PASSWORD  
17* POP SERVER NAME  
18* POP SERVER IP ADDR  
19* POP USER NAME  
20 POP PASSWORD  
21 LDAP SERVER NAME  
22 LDAP LOG IN NAME  
23 LDAP PASSWORD  
24 LDAP SEARCH BASE  
25 HOST NAME  
Password assigned to your machine. (Up to 10 characters)  
The name of the POP Mail Server. (Up to 60 characters).  
IP Address of the POP Mail Server.  
User Name assigned to your machine. (Up to 40 characters)  
Password assigned to your machine. (Up to 10 characters)  
The name of the LDAP Server. (Up to 60 characters)  
Login Name assigned to your machine. (Up to 40 characters)  
Password assigned to your machine. (Up to 10 characters)  
ID for starting the search in the directory on the LDAP server. (Up to 60 Characters)  
The Host Name assigned to your machine. (Up to 60 characters)  
The default information to be added to the Subject Line for all outgoing Email (up to 40  
characters). To manually input this information before transmission, change the Fax  
Parameter No. 159 (SUBJECT LINE ENTRY) to "2:Valid".  
26 DEFAULT SUBJECT  
Continued on the next page...  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the Internet Parameters  
Setting the User Parameters for the LAN Interface  
Parameter  
Comments  
When the outgoing email address is incomplete by SMTP standards, the Frequently  
Sent Domain specified here will be automatically added to the email address. This  
feature is also useful as a shortcut when manually entering email addresses to a  
frequently used Domain. (Up to 50 characters)  
27 DEFAULT DOMAIN  
SELECTABLE DOMAINS Enter up to 10 Domain Names that can be selected after the Domain "@" key is  
28  
(01) ~ (10)  
pressed using the "\/ or /\" key during Manual email addressing. (Up to 30 characters)  
This is a security password that allows Remote Programming of the Internet  
Parameters and Auto Dialer or the retrieval of the Journal via an Email. (Up to 10  
characters)  
29 REMOTE PASSWORD  
A password that provides Network security for your Relay Station (used exclusively for  
G3 relay purposes). (Up to 10 characters)  
30 RELAY XMT PASSWORD  
MANAGER’S EMAIL  
ADDR  
Department Manager’s Email Address for notification of all Internet relayed  
transmissions for supervision and cost control purposes. (Up to 60 characters)  
31  
Enter up to 10 Domain Name(s) that have been authorized to access your Internet Fax  
for Relayed XMT Request. (Up to 30 characters)  
Relay Domain, a.k.a. Domain Name in your machine.  
RELAY DOMAIN  
(01) ~ (10)  
32  
COMMUNITY NAME  
(01) ~ (02)  
33  
Community Name used for the Network Device Locator.  
34 DEVICE NAME  
Device Name used for the Network Device Locator.  
Device Location for the Network Device Locator.  
35 DEVICE LOCATION  
* Contact your Network Administrator for this Information.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Using Email to Program or Retrieve Parameters  
This feature is a powerful tool, which provides a convenient and easy way of retrieving or programming  
Internet Parameters, One-Touch, ABBR Dialing Numbers, Program keys and Journal retrieval from your PC  
by sending a text email message to your machine.  
Using your email application’s "Subject:" line as a command-input field, you can request your machine to  
perform the following commands:  
"Subject:" Line Command  
#set parameters(password)#  
#get parameters(password)#  
#set abbr(password)#  
#get abbr(password)#  
#get jnl(password)#  
Function  
1
2
3
4
5
Programs the Internet Parameters  
Retrieves the Internet Parameters  
Programs the Auto Dialer  
Retrieves the Auto Dialer Data  
Retrieves the current Journal data  
Where:  
"set" is used to program the data  
"get" is used to retrieve the data  
"parameters" represents Internet Parameters  
"abbr" represents Auto Dialer  
"jnl" represents Journal  
"password" is the Remote Password programmed in your machine's User Parameters  
(i.e. 123456789). Must be enclosed within the parenthesis "( )".  
The command must be enclosed within the hash (#) signs.  
Using a PC to Input the Internet Parameters Remotely  
This feature provides a convenient and an easy way to input the Internet Parameters right from your PC by  
sending a text email message to your machine.  
The following parameters can be input remotely via a PC. The other parameters must be entered from the  
machine in the User Parameters. (See page 48)  
• Sender Selection (up to 24 User Names, see page 150)  
• Default Domain  
• Selectable Domains (up to 10 additional Domain Names)  
• Remote Password  
• Manager’s Email Address  
• Relay XMT Password  
• Relay Domain (up to 10 Domain Names authorized for Relay XMT Request)  
• LDAP Server Name  
• LDAP Login Name  
• LDAP Password  
• LDAP Search Base  
• Community Name (up to 2 Community Names)  
• Device Name  
• Device Location  
Your machine interprets the command that you enter in the "Subject" line of your email message and  
performs one of the following functions, it Retrieves or Stores data into the Internet Parameters (User  
Parameters).  
The two types of commands that can be entered in the "Subject" line of your email:  
1) To Store  
data, type  
:
:
where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in  
your machine's User Parameters (i.e. 123456789).  
#set parameters(password)#  
You can enter the Internet Parameters shown above with this  
command the first time. However, if these fields already contain  
data, do not use this command as the existing information will  
be deleted and overwritten. Use the Retrieve command below  
instead, refer to pages 54 to 55.  
2) To Retrieve :  
data, type  
#get parameters(123456789)#  
1. To activate this feature, change the Fax Parameter No. 158 (PC REMOTE UPDATE) to "Valid".  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Inputting the Internet Parameters for the First Time  
Create a script in the message body of a plain text email and send it to your machine's email address. The  
"Subject" line of the email must be as follows:  
:
where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your  
machine's User Parameters. For security, always input a Remote  
Password in the User Parameters. [If the password was not  
programmed, represent it with "( )" and assign a password now.  
Ex: #set parameters( )#].  
#set parameters(password)#  
Important  
:
Do not use the above command if these fields already contain data,  
the existing information will be deleted and overwritten. Retrieve and  
backup the existing data onto your PC first by following the  
procedures for Retrieving and Editing the Internet Parameters on  
pages 54 to 57.  
The script sample to input the Internet Parameters is shown below.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(a)  
(b)  
(5)  
(c)  
(d)  
(a)  
(b)  
(6)  
(c)  
(d)  
(a)  
(b)  
(d)  
(7)  
(c)  
(1) To  
From  
:
:
Your machine's email address.  
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).  
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet  
Parameters and for error message notification.  
(Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)  
Subject  
:
To Store data, type: #set parameters(password)#  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Inputting the Internet Parameters for the First Time  
(2) @sender to @end  
:
Defines the Sender information to be set in section (2) between @sender to @end  
block. Register up to 24 User Names and their Email Addresses for the Sender  
Selection feature (See page 150).  
Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain  
blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field)  
The data string for each Sender Selection should be defined within a single line.  
The syntax is: <Sender Selection Number>;<User Name>;<Email Address>  
(a) 01 to 24: Indicates the Sender Selection Numbers  
(b) User Name (25-characters maximum)  
(c) Email Address (60-characters maximum)  
(3) @select-domain to @end  
:
Defines the Selectable Domains to be set in section (3) between @select-domain  
to @end block. Register up to 10 Domain Names that can be selected during  
manual email addressing. (30-characters maximum)  
The syntax is: <Number>;<Domain>  
(4) @relay-domain to @end  
(5) @system to @end  
:
:
Defines the Domain Names to be set in section (4) between @relay-domain to  
@end block. Register up to 10 Domain Names that have been authorized to  
access your Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request. (30-characters maximum)  
Defines the Internet Parameters to be set in section (5) between @system to  
@end block. Register the following Internet Parameters.  
(a) Default Domain (50-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: domain; <Default domain name>  
(b) Manager’s Email Address (60-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: manager; <Manager’s Email Address>  
(c) Relay XMT Password (10-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: relay; <Relay XMT Password>. Quotation marks " " enclosing  
the password, is required, as shown in the example above.  
(d) Remote Password (10-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: remote; <Remote Password>. Quotation marks " " enclosing  
the password, is required, as shown in the example above.  
(6) @ldap to @end  
:
Defines the LDAP Parameters to be set in section (6) between @ldap to @end  
block. Register the following Internet Parameters.  
(a) LDAP Server Name (60-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: server;<LDAP Server Name>  
(b) LDAP Login Name (40-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: login;<LDAP Login Name>  
(c) LDAP Password (10-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: password;<LDAP Password>Quotation marks " " enclosing the  
password, is required, as shown in the example above.  
(d) LDAP Search Base (40-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: base;<LDAP Search Base>  
(7) @mib to @end  
:
Defines the MIB to be set in section (7) between @mib to @end block. Register  
the following Internet Parameters.  
(a) Community Name(1) (32-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: com_name1;<Community Name(1)>  
(b) Community Name(2) (32-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: com_name2;<Community Name(2)>  
(c) Device Name(32-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: device;<Device Name>  
(d) Device Location(32-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: location;<Device Location>  
1. The machine cannot be programmed via email while it is communicating or printing.  
NOTE  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Retrieving the Internet Parameters for Backup  
To retrieve the existing Internet Parameters, send a plain text email to the your machine's email address  
with the following command in the "Subject" line:  
:
where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your  
machine's User Parameters (i.e. 123456789). For security, always  
input a Remote Password in the User Parameters. If it was not  
programmed, signify with "()" (i.e. #get parameters()#).  
Make sure that the CC..., Bcc... lines and the body of the email  
message is Blank.  
#get parameters(password)#  
(1)  
(1) To  
:
:
Your machine's email address.  
From  
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).  
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet  
Parameters and for error message notification.  
(Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)  
Subject  
:
To Retrieve data, type: #get parameters(password)#  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Retrieving the Internet Parameters for Backup  
After receiving the email message requesting the Internet Parameters, your machine sends back an email  
to the address specified in the "From:" line with the Internet Parameters in the body of the email.  
Your Machine’s Internet Parameters Email Sample  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(1) To  
From  
:
:
:
:
Your email address that was used to retrieve the Internet Parameters.  
Your machine's email address.  
Subject  
Your machine’s System Parameter List  
(2) @sender to @end  
Defines up to 24 User Names and their Email Addresses programmed in your  
machine for the Sender Selection in section (2) between @sender to @end block.  
(3) @select-domain to @end  
(4) @relay-domain to @end  
:
:
Defines up to 10 alternate Domain Names programmed in your machine for the  
Selectable Domains in section (3) between @select-domain to @end block.  
Defines up to 10 Domain Names programmed in your machine that have been  
authorized to access your Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request in section (4)  
between @relay-domain to @end block.  
Continued on the next page...  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Retrieving the Internet Parameters for Backup  
(5) @system to @end  
(6) @ldap to @end  
(7) @mib to @end  
:
:
:
Defines the following Internet Parameters programmed in your machine in section  
(5) between @system to @end block.  
(a) Default Domain  
(b) Manager’s Email Address  
(c) Relay XMT Password  
(d) Remote Password  
Defines the following Internet Parameters programmed in your machine in section  
(6) between @ldap to @end block.  
(a) LDAP Server Name  
(b) LDAP Login Name  
(c) LDAP Password  
(d) LDAP Search Base  
Defines the following Internet Parameters programmed in your machine in section  
(7) between @mib to @end block.  
(a) Community Name(1)  
(b) Community Name(2)  
(c) Device Name  
(d) Device Location  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Editing the Retrieved or Backup Internet Parameters File  
After receiving your machine’s email with the Internet Parameters, store the email file as text (.txt) on your  
PC for backup purposes.  
To change or update the Internet Parameters, follow the steps below:  
1. Create a New Email Message, fill out the "To" and "From" Address line and the Subject line information  
for section (1) below:  
To  
:
:
Your machine's email address.  
From  
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).  
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet  
Parameters and for error message notification.  
Subject  
:
To Store data, type: #set parameters(password)#  
2. Open the backup, Internet Parameter text file. Copy the body text and paste it on the body of the newly  
created email message.  
3. Delete any headers that may be present in the body of the email, as unsupported data will be rejected.  
The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine.  
4. Edit a parameter and/or add additional Sender Name(s) or Domain Name(s).  
5. When finished, use the "File/Save as..." command and save the updated file with ".txt" extension as a  
backup.  
6. Send the email message to your machine to update the Internet Parameters.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Editing the Retrieved or Backup Internet Parameters File  
Your Machine’s Internet Parameters Email Sample  
(1)  
(8)  
[Löschen sie diese kopfzeile, bevor sie eine E-Mail versenden.]  
MMM-dd-yyyy  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(1) To  
From  
:
:
Your machine's email address.  
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).  
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Internet  
Parameters and for error message notification.  
(Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)  
Subject  
:
To Store data, type: #set parameters(password)#  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Editing the Retrieved or Backup Internet Parameters File  
(2) @sender to @end  
:
Defines the Sender information to be set in section (2) between @sender to @end  
block. Edit, Delete or Register up to 24 User Names and their Email Addresses for  
the Sender Selection feature (See page 150).  
Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain  
blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field)  
The data string for each Sender Selection should be defined within a single line.  
The syntax is: <Sender Selection Number>;<User Name>;<Email Address>  
(a) 01 to 24: Indicates the Sender Selection Numbers  
(b) User Name (25-characters maximum)  
(c) Email Address (60-characters maximum)  
(3) @select-domain to @end  
:
Defines the Selectable Domains to be set in section (3) between @select-domain  
to @end block. Register up to 10 alternate Domain Names that can be selected  
during manual email addressing. (30-characters maximum)  
The syntax is: <Number>;<Domain>  
(4) @relay-domain to @end  
(5) @system to @end  
:
:
Defines the Domain Names to be set in section (4) between @relay-domain to  
@end block. Register up to 10 Domain Names that have been authorized to  
access your Internet Fax for Relayed XMT Request. (30-characters maximum)  
Defines the Internet Parameters to be set in section (5) between @system to  
@end block. Register the following Internet Parameters.  
(a) Default Domain (50-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: domain; <Default domain name>  
(b) Manager’s Email Address (60-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: manager; <Manager’s Email Address>  
(c) Relay XMT Password (10-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: relay; <Relay XMT Password>. Quotation marks " " enclosing  
the password, is required, as shown in the example above.  
(d) Remote Password (10-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: remote; <Remote Password>. Quotation marks " " enclosing  
the password, is required, as shown in the example above.  
(Notice that for the above example, we have changed the Manager’s Email  
Address, Relay XMT Password and the Remote Password)  
(6) @ldap to @end  
:
Defines the LDAP Parameters to be set in section (6) between @ldap to @end  
block. Register the following Internet Parameters.  
(a) LDAP Server Name (60-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: server;<LDAP Server Name>  
(b) LDAP Login Name (40-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: login;<LDAP Login Name>  
(c) LDAP Password (10-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: password;<LDAP Password>Quotation marks " " enclosing the  
password, is required, as shown in the example above.  
(d) LDAP Search Base (40-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: base;<LDAP Search Base>  
(7) @mib to @end  
:
Defines the MIB to be set in section (7) between @mib to @end block. Register  
the following Internet Parameters.  
(a) Community Name(1) (32-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: com_name1;<Community Name(1)>  
(b) Community Name(2) (32-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: com_name2;<Community Name(2)>  
(c) Device Name(32-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: device;<Device Name>  
(d) Device Location(32-characters maximum).  
The syntax is: location;<Device Location>  
(8)  
:
This header must be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for  
reprogramming of Internet Parameters.  
The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine, therefore, you  
can leave it as is, or delete it if you wish.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Using a PC to Update the Auto Dialer Remotely  
This feature provides a convenient and an easy way to Update, Backup or Restore the Phone Book data  
right from your PC by sending a text email message to your machine.  
Your machine interprets the command that you enter in the "Subject" line of your email message and  
performs one of the following functions, it Retrieves or Stores data into the Auto Dialer (Phone Book).  
The two types of commands that can be entered in the "Subject" line of your email:  
1) To Store  
data, type  
:
:
where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in  
your machine's User Parameters (i.e. 123456789).  
#set abbr(password)#  
You can program any known unused Auto Dialer location(s)  
with this command for the first time, without having to Retrieve  
the Phone Book data first. If the desired Auto Dialer location  
already contains data, your machine will overwrite the existing  
data, therefore, we recommend that you use the Retrieve  
command below instead.  
To edit existing Auto Dialer locations, refer to pages 66 to 67.  
2) To Retrieve :  
data, type  
#get abbr(123456789)#  
1. To activate this feature, change the Fax Parameter No. 158 (PC REMOTE UPDATE) to "Valid".  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Deleting the Entire Auto Dialer  
If you wish to delete the entire Auto Dialer data in your machine, type the following command in the body of  
the email message:  
@command  
delete  
@end  
This command can also be inserted before the @begin to @end block, to erase the entire Auto Dialer data  
first, then reprogram it with new data.  
This method will also prevent the "Overwrite Warning Message" that is sent back from your machine, when  
the current Auto Dialer station is overwritten.  
To erase the entire Auto Dialer data, type the following command in the "Subject" line of your email:  
:
where the password is the Remote Password programmed in your  
machine's User Parameters.  
#set abbr(password)#  
Retrieve and backup the existing data onto your PC first by following  
the procedures for Retrieving and Editing on pages 64 to 67.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Programming One-Touch/ABBR. No. for the First Time  
Create a script in the message body of a plain text email and send it to your machine's email address.The  
"Subject" line of the email must be as follows:  
:
where the password is the Remote Password programmed in your  
machine's User Parameters.  
#set abbr(password)#  
The script sample to program the One-Touch/ABBR. No. for the first time is shown in the illustration below:  
First Time Remote Programming of One-Touch/ABBR. No. Sample  
(1)  
(a) (b)  
(c)  
(d)  
(e)  
(2)  
Headq(uaa)rters(b)  
(c)  
(f)  
(d)  
(e)  
(3)  
(f)  
(g)  
(h)  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Programming One-Touch/ABBR. No. for the First Time  
Explanation of Contents  
(1) To  
From  
:
:
Your machine's email address.  
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).  
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the Phone Book  
data and for error message notification.  
(Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)  
Subject  
:
:
To Store data, type: #set abbr(password)#  
To Retrieve data, type: #get abbr(password)#  
(2) @begin to @end block  
Defines the data to be set into the Phone Book between @begin to @end block.  
Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain  
blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field)  
The data string for each station should be defined within a single line.  
(a) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. or Program Keys to be programmed  
001 to 100:  
indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum)  
1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28  
2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as  
One-Touch dialing number)  
(b) Station-name: Name of the station being programmed (15 alpha-numeric  
characters maximum)  
(c) Station-address: email address or telephone number of the station being  
programmed  
(d) Routing-subaddress: sub-address to be used for routing (20-digit maximum)  
(e) Routing-id-number: TSI to be used for routing (20-digit maximum)  
(f) The End Receiving Station’s telephone number is entered after the hash sign  
(#).  
(3) @program to @end  
:
Defines the data to be set into Program Keys as a Group Key or POP Access Key  
between @program to @end block.  
(a) Program Key: P01 - P04  
(b) Station-name as a Group Key: Name of the station being programmed (15  
alpha-numeric characters maximum)  
(c) GROUP: The syntax used to set the Program Key as a Group Key  
(d) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. or Program Keys to be programmed  
001 to 100:  
indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum)  
1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28  
2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as  
One-Touch dialing number)  
(e) POP: The syntax used to set the Program Key as a POP Access Key  
(f) POP User-name: Name of the station being programmed (40 alpha-numeric  
characters maximum)  
(g) POP Password: POP Password (10 alpha-numeric characters maximum)  
(h) Set whether the emails on the POP Server are deleted after retrieving the  
emails.  
1. If a POP user account is programmed into the P1 to P4 program keys, the data programmed  
for this key cannot be deleted, even when the delete command is specified.  
2. The email address and the telephone number cannot be programmed via email when:  
• One-Touch Number has been used for communication reservation.  
NOTE  
• Received documents are stored in the image data memory of the machine.  
• While the machine is communicating or printing.  
3. When the email address and telephone number are programmed via email, a program result  
email is sent back.  
4. Some email applications automatically insert a line feed in the middle of a line when the  
number of characters in a line exceed a specific number. Turn "Off" the automatic line feed, or  
define the number of characters per line to prevent a line feed, or the data will be ignored.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Retrieving One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data for Backup  
To retrieve the existing auto dialer data, send a plain text email to your machine's email address with the  
following command in the "Subject" line:  
:
where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your  
machine's User Parameters (i.e. 123456789).  
#get abbr(password)#  
Make sure that the Cc, Bcc lines and the body of the email message is Blank.  
Retrieving One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data Sample  
(1)  
(1) To  
From  
:
:
Your machine's email address.  
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).  
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the One-Touch/  
ABBR. No. data and for error message notification.  
(Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)  
Subject  
:
To Retrieve data, type: #get abbr(password)#  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Retrieving One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data for Backup  
After receiving the email message requesting the existing auto dialer data, your machine sends back an  
email to the address specified in the "From:" line with the auto dialer information in the body of the email.  
Your Machine’s Auto Dialer Email Sample  
(1)  
MMM-dd-yyyy 14:15  
(2)  
Headquarters  
(3)  
(1) To  
From  
:
:
:
:
Your email address that was used to retrieve the Auto Dialer data.  
Your machine's email address.  
Subject  
ONE-TOUCH/ABBR. List  
(2) @begin to @end block  
Defines One-Touch Keys, Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Program Keys stored  
as a One-Touch Key programmed in your machine in section (2) between @begin  
to @end block.  
(3) @program to @end  
:
Defines Program Keys stored as a Group Key or POP Access Key programmed in  
your machine in section (3) between @program to @end block.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Editing the Retrieved or Backup One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data File  
After receiving your machine email with the auto dialer data, store the email file as text (.txt) on your PC for  
backup purposes.  
To change or update the auto dialer, follow the steps below:  
1. Create a New Email Message, fill out the "To" and "From" Address line and the Subject line information  
for section (1) below:  
To  
:
:
Your machine's email address.  
From  
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).  
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the One-Touch/  
ABBR. No. data and for error message notification.  
Subject  
:
To Store data, type: #set abbr(password)#  
2. Open the backup, auto dialer text file. Copy the body text and paste it on the body of the newly created  
email message.  
3. Delete any headers that may be present in the body of the email, as unsupported data will be rejected.  
The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine.  
4. Edit and/or add additional One-Touch/ABBR. No. stations.  
5. When finished, use the "File/Save as..." command and save the updated file with ".txt" extension as a  
backup.  
6. Send the email message to your machine to update the auto dialer.  
Your Machine’s Auto Dialer Email Sample  
(1)  
(5)  
[Löschen sie diese kopfzeile, bevor sie eine E-Mail versenden]  
MMM-dd-yyyy  
(a) (b)  
(c)  
(d) (e)  
(2)  
Headquarters  
(f)  
(4)  
(a) (b)  
(d)  
(c)  
(e)  
(3)  
(f)  
(g)  
(h)  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Editing the Retrieved or Backup One-Touch/ABBR. No. Data File  
(1) To  
From  
:
:
Your machine's email address.  
This field is normally not visible when creating new email message(s).  
It is your default email address (email application), for retrieving the One-Touch/  
ABBR. No. data and for error message notification.  
(Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program.)  
Subject  
:
:
To Store data, type: #set abbr(password)#  
(2) @begin to @end block  
Defines the One-Touch Keys, Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Program Keys  
stored as a One-Touch Key to be set in section (2) between @begin to @end  
block.  
Edit, Delete or Register the information.  
Separate each data field with a semicolon (;). (If the remaining fields are to remain  
blank, insert a semicolon (;) for each blank field)  
The data string for each station should be defined within a single line. The syntax  
is:<Entry-number>;<Station-name>;<Station-address>;<Routing-  
subaddress>;<Routing-id-number>  
(a) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. or Program Keys to be programmed  
001 to 100:  
indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum)  
1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28  
2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as  
One-Touch dialing number)  
(b) Station-name: Name of the station being programmed (15 alpha-numeric  
characters maximum)  
(c) Station-address: email address or telephone number of the station being  
programmed  
(d) Routing-subaddress: sub-address to be used for routing (20-digit maximum)  
(e) Routing-id-number: TSI to be used for routing (20-digit maximum)  
(f) The End Receiving Station’s telephone number is entered after the hash sign  
(#).  
(3) @program to @end  
:
Defines the Program Keys stored as a Group Key or POP Access Key to be set in  
section (3) between @program to @end block.  
Edit, Delete or Register the information.  
(a) Program Key: P01 - P04  
(b) Station-name as a Group Key: Name of the station being programmed (15  
alpha-numeric characters maximum)  
(c) GROUP: The syntax used to set the Program Key as a Group Key  
(d) Entry-number: One-Touch, ABBR. No. to be programmed  
001 to 100:  
indicates ABBR. No. 001 to 100 (100 stations maximum)  
1001 to 1028: indicates One-Touch numbers from 01 to 28  
2001 to 2004: indicates Program Keys (P1 to P4 programmed as  
One-Touch dialing number)  
(e) POP:The syntax used to set the Program Key as a POP Access Key.  
(f) POP User-name: Name of the POP user account (40 alpha-numeric characters  
maximum)  
(g) POP Password: POP Password (10 alpha-numeric characters maximum)  
(h) Set whether the emails on the POP Server are deleted after retrieving the  
emails.  
(4) These 2 ABBR. No. stations were added to the list.  
(5) This header must be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for reprogramming of One-Touch/ABBR. No.  
The information following the "#" sign is ignored by your machine, therefore, you can leave it as is or delete it if you  
wish.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  
Using Email to Retrieve the Journal  
To retrieve the existing Journal data, send an email to your machine's email address with the following  
command in the "Subject" line:  
:
where the "password" is the Remote Password programmed in your  
machine's User Parameters (i.e. 123456789).  
#get jnl(password)#  
The Journal will be send back to the originating station’s email address.  
After receiving the journal, use a fixed width font (i.e. Courier), in order to align the received journal’s  
contents on the PC.  
A separate email message is sent by your machine, an "Internet Fax Return Receipt" to the Manager’s  
email address programmed in the User Parameters, informing of the Journal transfer.  
1. To activate this feature, change the Fax Parameter No. 158 (PC REMOTE UPDATE) to "Valid".  
NOTE  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
memo  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Your Machine  
Programming Email Address and Telephone Numbers  
Programming the Auto Dialer  
One-Touch and Abbreviated dialing / email addressing are two fast ways of dialing full telephone numbers  
or email addresses. To use these dialing or addressing methods, you must first store the telephone  
numbers or email addresses into the Auto Dialer.  
To program the One-Touch key, follow the steps below  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
1:ONE-TOUCH  
2:ABBR NO.  
2
1
ONE-TOUCH<  
>
PRESS ONE-TOUCH  
3
4
<01>  
Ex:  
ENTER EMAIL ADDRESS  
or  
To change the input mode (between "ENTER EMAIL  
ADDRESS" and "ENTER TEL. NO."),  
<01>  
ENTER TEL. NO.  
EMAIL  
press  
.
Enter the email address using character keys (up to 60  
characters).  
5
<01>  
Ex:  
a b c  
p a n a s o n  
i
c
c o m  
or  
or  
ENTER LETTER(S)  
Press the  
key and enter the full  
DIRECTORYSEARCH  
or part of email address/station name. Then, press  
or  
keys if you wish to use the LDAP Server to acquire  
and program the email address and the station names.  
ENTER LETTER(S)  
N❚  
(01)Panasonic NT002  
Ex:  
to search for [email protected]  
n
or  
or  
Enter the telephone number  
(up to 36 digits including pauses and spaces).  
<01>  
9-555 1234  
Ex:  
9
PAUSE 5 5 5 SPACE 1 2 3 4  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Programming Email Address and Telephone Numbers  
Programming the Auto Dialer  
<01>ENTER NAME  
6
or  
<01>Panasonic NY002  
or  
<01>ENTER NAME  
9-555 1234  
Enter the station name using character keys  
<01> SALES DEPT  
(up to 15 characters).  
7
8
Ex:  
D E P T  
S A L E S SPACE  
or  
<01> SALES DEPT  
or  
<01> SALES DEPT  
9-555 1234  
ONE-TOUCH<  
>
PRESS ONE-TOUCH  
To record another number, repeat Steps 4 to 8.  
To return to standby, press  
.
STOP  
1. If you enter the Station name with the Fax Parameter 172 (DIRECT IFAX XMT) set to "Valid,"  
you are allowed to select the usage of Direct IFAX XMT.  
NOTE  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Email Address and Telephone Numbers  
Programming the Auto Dialer  
To program the ABBR. dialing number or email address  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
1:ONE-TOUCH  
2:ABBR NO.  
2
2
ABBR[  
]
ENTER ABBR NO.  
3
4
[022]  
ENTER EMAIL ADDRESS  
Ex:  
(001 to 100, up to 100 stations)  
0 2 2  
To change the input mode (between "ENTER EMAIL  
ADDRESS" and "ENTER TEL. NO."),  
or  
EMAIL  
[022]  
ENTER TEL. NO.  
press  
.
Enter the email address using character keys (up to 60  
characters).  
5
[022]  
Ex:  
a b c  
p a n a s o n  
i
c
c o m  
or  
or  
ENTER LETTER(S)  
Press the  
key and enter the full  
DIRECTORYSEARCH  
or part of email address/station name. Then, press  
or  
keys if you wish to use the LDAP Server to acquire  
and program the email address and the station names.  
ENTER LETTER(S)  
N❚  
Ex:  
to search for [email protected]  
n
(01)Panasonic NT002  
or  
or  
Enter the telephone number  
(up to 36 digits including pauses and spaces).  
[022]  
9-555 2345  
Ex:  
9
PAUSE 5 5 5 SPACE 2 3 4 5  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Email Address and Telephone Numbers  
Programming the Auto Dialer  
[022]ENTER NAME  
6
or  
[022]Panasonic NY002  
or  
[022]ENTER NAME  
9-555 2345  
Enter the station name using character keys  
[022]ACCOUNTING  
(up to 15 characters).  
7
8
Ex: A C C O U N T I N G  
or  
[022]ACCOUNTING  
or  
[022]ACCOUNTING  
9-555 2345  
ABBR[  
]
ENTER ABBR NO.  
To record another number, repeat Steps 4 to 8.  
To return to standby, press  
.
STOP  
1. If you enter the Station name with the Fax Parameter 172 (DIRECT IFAX XMT) set to "Valid,"  
you are allowed to select the usage of Direct IFAX XMT.  
NOTE  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Email Address and Telephone Numbers  
Editing or Erasing the Auto Dialing Number / Email Address  
If you have to change or erase any of the One-Touch/Abbreviated dialing numbers or email addresses,  
follow the steps below.  
To edit One-Touch/ABBR dialing number or email address  
1:ONE-TOUCH  
2:ABBR NO.  
1
7
2
ONE-TOUCH<  
PRESS ONE-TOUCH  
>
Select  
Select  
for One-Touch dialing number / email address.  
for ABBR dialing number / email address.  
1
2
2
3
Ex:  
1
<01> SALES DEPT  
Enter the station you wish to change.  
Ex:  
or  
<01> SALES DEPT  
9-555 1234  
<01> SALES DEPT  
ENTER EMAIL ADDRESS  
4
or  
<01> SALES DEPT  
ENTER TEL. NO.  
To change the input mode (between "ENTER EMAIL  
ADDRESS" and "ENTER TEL. NO."),  
5
6
EMAIL  
press  
.
<01> SALES DEPT  
Enter a new email address. (See Note 1 and 2)  
Ex:  
y
x
z
p a n a s o n  
i
c
or  
c o m  
<01> SALES DEPT  
or  
9-555 3456  
Enter a new telephone number. (See Note 1 and 2)  
Ex:  
9
PAUSE 5 5 5 SPACE 3 4 5 6  
<01>SALES DEPT  
7
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Email Address and Telephone Numbers  
Editing or Erasing the Auto Dialing Number / Email Address  
<01>ENTER NAME  
8
or  
Enter a new station name. (See Note 1)  
<01>ENTER NAME  
9-555 3456  
Ex:  
P A N A F A X  
<01> PANAFAX  
or  
<01> PANAFAX  
9-555 3456  
ONE-TOUCH<  
PRESS ONE-TOUCH  
>
9
To return to standby, press  
.
STOP  
1. If you make a mistake, use  
number, press  
or  
to move the cursor one space beyond the incorrect  
NOTE  
then re-enter the new number.  
CLEAR  
2. If the One-Touch/Abbreviated dialing number / email address has been used for a  
communication reservation, the settings cannot be changed or erased until the communication  
has finished.  
To change or erase the settings, cancel the communication first by Edit File Mode. (See page  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Email Address and Telephone Numbers  
Editing or Erasing the Auto Dialing Number / Email Address  
To erase the One-Touch/ABBR. dialing number or email address  
1:ONE-TOUCH  
2:ABBR NO.  
1
7
2
ONE-TOUCH<  
PRESS ONE-TOUCH  
>
Select  
Select  
for One-Touch dialing number / email address.  
for ABBR dialing number / email address.  
1
2
2
3
Ex:  
1
<01> SALES DEPT  
Enter the station you wish to erase.  
Ex:  
or  
<01> SALES DEPT  
9-555 1234  
<01> SALES DEPT  
ENTER EMAIL ADDRESS  
4
5
or  
<01> SALES DEPT  
ENTER TEL. NO.  
ONE-TOUCH<  
>
PRESS ONE-TOUCH  
To return to standby, press  
.
STOP  
1. If the One-Touch/Abbreviated dialing number / email address has been used for a  
NOTE  
communication reservation, the settings cannot be changed or erased until the communication  
has finished.  
To change or erase the settings, cancel the communication first by Edit File Mode. (See page  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Email Address and Telephone Numbers  
Printing Out a Directory Sheet  
After programming the Auto Dialer, you can print out the directory sheet which includes the first 12  
characters of each station name. Cut along the dotted line and place it over the One-Touch keys under the  
Directory Sheet Cover. To print a directory sheet, follow the steps below.  
PRINT OUT  
(1-7)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
6
* PRINTING *  
DIRECTORY SHEET  
7
Your machine prints out the directory sheet.  
******************* -DIRECTORY SHEET- ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 15:00 ***
201 555 1234  
AMERICA  
ASIA  
EMAIL ADDRESS:[email protected]  
AFRICA  
JAPAN  
........  
........  
........  
CANADA  
BRAZIL  
dotted line  
********************************************* -HEAD OFFICE  
-
PANASONIC  
- ****** -  
-
201 555 1212- ****
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customizing Your Machine  
General Description  
Your machine has a variety of adjustable Fax Parameters. These parameters, listed in the Parameter Table,  
are preset for you and do not need to be changed. If you do want to make a change, read the table carefully.  
Some parameters, such as the Resolution and Contrast parameters, can be temporarily changed by simple  
key operation just before a transmission is made. When the transmission ends, however, these parameters  
return to their preset values (Home position). Other parameters can only be changed by the procedure  
described below.  
Setting the Fax Parameters  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
4
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=001  
Enter Fax Parameter number from the Parameter Table.  
Ex: for CONTRAST  
3
4
0 0 1  
01 CONTRAST  
1:NORMAL  
01 CONTRAST  
2:LIGHTER  
Enter the new setting value.  
Ex: for LIGHTER  
5
6
2
02 RESOLUTION  
2:FINE  
To set another parameter, press  
to return to  
CLEAR  
Step 3 or press  
to return to standby.  
STOP  
1. To scroll the Fax Parameters in Steps 2 or 4, press  
2. To print out a Fax Parameter List, see page 220.  
or  
.
NOTE  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Customizing Your Machine  
Fax Parameter Table  
Setting  
Number  
No.  
Parameter  
Setting  
Comments  
001  
CONTRAST  
*1  
2
Normal  
Lighter  
Darker  
Setting the home position of the CONTRAST key.  
3
002  
RESOLUTION  
1
Standard Setting the home position for the RESOLUTION.  
*2  
3
Fine  
S-Fine  
4
Halftone  
(Fine)  
5
Halftone  
(S-Fine)  
004  
005  
STAMP  
*1  
2
Off  
On  
Setting the home position of the STAMP key.  
To select the stamp function when document is stored in  
memory, see Fax Parameter No. 28.  
MEMORY  
1
Off  
On  
Setting the home position for memory transmission/copy  
mode. (This setting can be temporarily changed by using  
F8-9 (MEMORY XMT))  
*2  
006  
007  
DIALING METHOD  
HEADER PRINT  
1
*2  
*1  
2
Pulse  
Tone  
Selecting the dialing method.  
Inside  
Selecting the printing position of the header.  
Inside : Prints inside of TX copy area.  
Outside : Prints outside of TX copy area.  
No print : Header is not printed.  
Outside  
No print  
3
008  
009  
HEADER FORMAT  
RCV'D TIME PRINT  
*1  
2
Logo, ID No. Selecting the header format.  
From To  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine prints the received date &  
time, remote ID, percentage of reduction and page number  
on the bottom of each received page.  
010  
012  
KEY/BUZZER  
VOLUME  
1
*2  
3
Off  
Soft  
Selecting the volume of the Key/Buzzer tone.  
Loud  
COMM. JOURNAL  
1
Off  
Selecting the home position of printout mode for COMM.  
Journal Off/Always/INC.  
2
Always  
Inc. Only  
Off  
: Does not print  
Always : Always prints  
Inc. Only : Prints only when communication has failed.  
*3  
013  
AUTO JOURNAL  
PRINT  
1
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine prints the journal  
automatically after every 32 transactions.  
*2  
Continued on the next page...  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Customizing Your Machine  
Fax Parameter Table  
Setting  
No.  
Parameter  
Setting  
Comments  
Setting the receive mode.  
Number  
017  
RECEIVE MODE  
1
*2  
3
TEL  
FAX  
FAX/TEL  
SW.  
4
*1  
2
TAM/FAX  
20 sec.  
30 sec.  
40 sec.  
50 sec.  
1 sec.  
---  
018  
019  
OPERATOR CALL  
TIMER  
Selecting the length of time that your machine signals  
(Rings) for an incoming voice call in Fax/Tel Auto  
Switching mode. (See page 130)  
3
4
OGM LENGTH  
(TAM I/F)  
1
Setting for the OGM length of your TAM from 1 to 60  
seconds. The machine will not start to detect SILENCE  
until the time setting has lapsed.  
---  
60  
1
(Default = 20 sec.)  
60 sec.  
Invalid  
Valid  
020 SILENT DETECTION  
(TAM I/F)  
Selecting the Silent Detection Mode.  
*2  
1
022  
SUBSTITUTE RCV  
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine receives to memory when  
recording paper runs out, toner runs out or recording paper  
is jammed.  
*2  
023 RECORDING PAPER  
SIZE  
1
*2  
3
A4  
Setting the recording paper size installed in your machine.  
Letter  
Legal  
Fixed  
Auto  
024  
025  
PRINT REDUCTION  
REDUCTION RATIO  
1
Selecting print reduction mode.  
Fixed :Reduce received document according to setting of  
Parameter No. 25.  
Auto :Reduce received document according to the length  
of received documents.  
*2  
70  
----  
70%  
----  
Selecting fixed print reduction ratio from 70% to 100%.  
This parameter functions only when fixed print reduction is  
selected on Fax Parameter No. 24.  
*100  
100%  
(----)  
026 POLLING PASSWORD  
027 POLLED FILE SAVE  
Setting a 4-digit password for secured polling.  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine retains the polled  
document in memory even after the document is polled  
once.  
028 STAMP AT MEM. XMT  
1
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine stamps the original  
documents when storing the documents into memory.  
(Depending on the Stamp setting on the Control Panel)  
*2  
031  
INCOMPLETE FILE  
SAVE  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine retains the document in  
memory if the document is not successfully transmitted.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Customizing Your Machine  
Fax Parameter Table  
Setting  
Number  
No.  
Parameter  
Setting  
Comments  
032  
COPY REDUCTION  
1
Manual  
Auto  
Selecting whether the machine performs the copy  
reduction ratio automatically or manually.  
Manual : The machine will prompt you for the Zoom ratio  
(100% to 70%) when making copies.  
*2  
Auto  
: The machine will automatically determine the  
reduction ratio according to the length of the  
original document.  
034  
ENERGY SAVER  
MODE  
1
Off  
To reduce the power consumption in standby, select either  
Energy-Saver or Sleep mode and specify the Delay Time  
(1 to 120 minutes) for the machine to enter into the  
selected mode.  
*2  
Energy-  
Saver  
The Delay Timer setting is only available in the Energy-  
Saver or Sleep Modes.  
Off  
: The unit will remain in standby  
mode and consume more energy  
than when in Energy-Saver or  
Sleep modes.  
Energy-Saver Mode: Saves energy by consuming less  
power than when in standby mode  
by turning off the fuser unit after  
the specified time.  
035  
036  
DAYLIGHT TIME  
1
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the clock adjusts for Daylight Saving  
Time automatically. The built-in clock will advance 1 hour  
at 2:00 am on the first Sunday in April and fallback 1 hour  
at 2:00 am on the last Sunday in October.  
*2  
RING PATTERN  
DETECT (DRD)  
(See Note 2)  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
All ring patterns.  
Select a ring pattern for automatic answering.  
1: A Standard ring pattern.  
2: B Double ring pattern.  
3: C Triple ring pattern (Short-Short-Long).  
4: D All other triple ring patterns, except the  
type C described above.  
037  
RCV TO MEMORY  
(----)  
(----)  
Enter a 4-digit password used to print out the received  
document in memory by using F8-5 (RCV TO MEMORY).  
When F8-5 is set to On, this parameter will not be shown  
on the LCD display. (See page 170)  
038  
039  
ACCESS CODE  
Enter a 4-digit Access Code to secure the machine from  
unauthorized use. (See page 168)  
PIN CODE ACCESS  
*1  
2
None  
Suffix  
Prefix  
Invalid  
Valid  
Off  
Selecting the access method (Prefix or Suffix) to dial a  
number with PIN Code. (See page 175)  
3
042 CONF. POLLED FILE  
SAVE  
*1  
2
Selecting whether the machine saves the confidential  
polled file even after the file is polled once.  
043  
PASSWORD-XMT  
*1  
2
Setting a 4-digit XMT-Password and selecting whether the  
machine performs and checks the XMT-Password of the  
receiving station when transmitting. (See page 196)  
On  
Continued on the next page...  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Customizing Your Machine  
Fax Parameter Table  
Setting  
No.  
Parameter  
Setting  
Comments  
Number  
044  
PASSWORD-RCV  
*1  
2
Off  
On  
Setting a 4-digit RCV-Password and selecting whether the  
machine performs and checks the RCV-Password of the  
transmitting station when receiving. (See page 197)  
046  
SELECT RCV  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine performs selective  
047 REMOTE RECEPTION  
1
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether or not the machine accepts remote  
reception command. (See page 129)  
*2  
*1  
2
051  
REMOTE  
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether or not the machine accepts to update  
the firmware or Remote Diagnostics from the remote  
station. Please ask your Panasonic Authorized Dealer for  
details.  
DIAGNOSTIC  
052  
053  
054  
DIAGNOSTIC  
PASSWORD  
(----)  
(----)  
Setting the password for Remote Diagnostic Mode.  
Please ask your Panasonic Authorized Dealer for details.  
SUB-ADDRESS  
PASSWORD  
Setting a 20-digit password for secured sub-address  
communication.  
FAX FORWARD  
COVER SHEET  
LANGUAGE  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Off  
Selecting whether the machine performs Fax Forwarding  
to the specified destination. (See page 177)  
056  
058  
*1  
2
Setting the home position of the Cover Sheet parameter in  
the Select Mode. (See page 173)  
On  
*1  
2
A-English Selecting the language to be shown on the display and  
reports.  
C-French  
3
Spanish  
065  
PRINT COLLATION  
1
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine prints out documents in  
*2  
1
082 QUICK MEMORY XMT  
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine performs Quick Memory  
Transmission. (See page 108 to 110)  
Invalid : Stores all documents into memory first before  
dialing the telephone number.  
*2  
Valid : Starts dialing the telephone number immediately  
after storing the first page.  
099  
MEMORY SIZE  
(Flash Memory)  
-
-
Displays the amount of base and optional memory  
installed.  
(Base Memory + Optional Memory)  
140  
142  
LAN RELAY XMT  
REQUEST  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine performs LAN Relay XMT  
Request.  
RELAY XMT  
(a.k.a. LAN RELAY  
STATION on UF-770i)  
1
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine accepts and performs G3  
relayed transmission. (Relay Station Functions)  
*2  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Customizing Your Machine  
Fax Parameter Table  
Setting  
Number  
No.  
Parameter  
Setting  
Comments  
143 RELAY XMT REPORT  
1
*2  
3
Off  
Setting how the COMM. Journal for relayed transmission  
is sent to the originator.  
Always  
Inc. Only  
Off  
: Does not send.  
Always : Always sends.  
Inc. Only : Sends only if communication has failed.  
144  
EMAIL CHARACTER  
SET  
1
*2  
*1  
2
Japanese Selecting the Character Set when receiving or sending  
email text.  
English  
145 SENDER SELECTION  
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting a pre-programmed sender’s name and email  
address before each transmission.  
146  
POP TIMER  
----  
3
0 to 60 min. Setting the time interval for the machine to check for email  
on the POP Server.  
(0 = Does not check the POP Server for email.)  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
AUTO POP RCV  
1
*2  
1
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine automatically downloads  
an email from the POP Server.  
DELETE POP RCV  
EMAIL  
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the email will be deleted automatically  
after retrieval from the POP Server.  
*2  
*1  
2
DELETE POP ERR  
EMAIL  
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether to delete the email that includes an  
incompatible file attachment from the POP Server.  
IFAX RETURN  
RECEIPT  
1
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether to send a return receipt when receiving  
from another Panasonic Internet Fax.  
*2  
1
EMAIL HEADER  
FORMAT  
All  
Selecting the header information to print when an email is  
received. (Normally used for Troubleshooting. It shows  
the path of the email transmission before arriving at your  
machine.)  
*2  
Subject/  
From/To  
3
*1  
2
Off  
152  
153  
SUB-ADDRESS  
ROUTING  
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether to automatically route a received fax or  
email using ITU-T Sub-address.  
TSI ROUTING  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether to route a received fax to a telephone  
number or an email address preprogrammed in Phone  
Book using the originating fax’s Numeric ID (TSI frame  
information).  
154  
ROUTING HEADER  
FORMAT  
*1  
2
Originator Selecting the type of email header to be included in the  
"From" field of each routed faxes.  
Relay  
Originator  
: The originating fax machine’s TSI will  
appear in the "From" field of the routed  
email.  
Station  
Relay Station : The routing station’s email address will  
appear in the "From" field of the routed  
email.  
155  
PRINT ROUTED  
DOCUMENT  
*1  
2
Inc. Only Selecting whether a received fax to be routed is always  
printed or only when the routing operation fails.  
Always  
Continued on the next page...  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Customizing Your Machine  
Fax Parameter Table  
Setting  
No.  
Parameter  
Setting  
Comments  
Number  
156 PRINT FORWARDED  
DOCUMENT  
*1  
2
Inc. Only  
Always  
Selecting whether a memory received fax or email to be  
forwarded is always printed or only when forwarding is  
incomplete.  
157  
158  
TRANSACTION  
JOURNAL  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine sends a transaction journal  
to the pre-programmed email address.  
PC REMOTE  
UPDATE  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine will accept commands from  
an email application, to:  
(a) Program the Internet Parameters  
(b) Program the Auto Dialer  
(c) Allow retrieval of the Journal  
159  
160  
161  
162  
SUBJECT LINE  
ENTRY  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the "Subject" line can be programmed  
during each transmission.  
DEFAULT DOMAIN  
DNS SERVER  
1
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether the machine accepts to insert the  
Default Domain when entering Manual Number Dialing.  
*2  
1
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether to use the DNS Server for the Internet  
communication.  
*2  
1
TIFF VIEWER URL  
None  
English  
Selecting whether to include the URL Address in the email  
message body.  
*2  
3
English+  
Japanese  
163  
164  
ROUTING HEADER  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether to add the Header Print information of  
the Routing Station on the top edge of each routed pages.  
IFAX XMT HEADER  
(Email only)  
*1  
2
Included  
Not Included  
Selecting whether to include the header when sending a  
document to an addressee in the same Domain as  
specified in the Default Domain parameter. (This is useful  
when using the machine to scan documents back to your  
PC)  
Note: When sending to a Domain other than as specified  
in the Default Domain parameter, the header will be  
included regardless of the selection.  
169  
170  
DHCP CLIENT  
1
Invalid  
Valid  
Select whether the machine would automatically acquire  
the Network Parameters from the DHCP Server. (Such as  
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP Address,  
etc.)  
Note: If you change the setting of this parameter, the  
machine will reboot automaticaly.  
*2  
SMTP  
AUTHENTICATION  
(See Note 3)  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether your SMTP Server (Outgoing Mail  
Server) requires authentication with a user name and  
password before accepting email. After change the setting  
to "Valid", you can enter the user name and password  
assigned to your machine by your network administrator.  
171 POP BEFORE SMTP  
(See Note 3)  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether your SMTP Server (Outgoing Mail  
Server) requires authentication by first retrieving incoming  
email from the POP Server before accepting email.  
(Please consult with your network administrator).  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Customizing Your Machine  
Fax Parameter Table  
Setting  
Number  
No.  
Parameter  
Setting  
Comments  
172  
DIRECT IFAX XMT  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether to be prompted during One-Touch/  
ABBR registration if the station you are programming is to  
receive Internet Fax directly without going through a Mail  
Server.  
173  
DELIVERY NOTICE  
(HOME)  
*1  
2
Off  
On  
Setting the home position of requesting a Delivery Notice  
(MDN) on the Function Select Mode (F8-2) when sending  
an email/Internet Fax.  
The delivery notice received will not be printed. It is used  
to update the communication status on the Transaction  
Journal of the original email sent.  
174  
177  
APOP  
AUTHENTICATION  
(See Note 3)  
*1  
2
Invalid  
Valid  
Selecting whether to use APOP authentication method  
when retrieving email/Internet Fax from the POP Server.  
(This setting is server dependant; consult with your  
network administrator).  
XMT FILE FORMAT  
*1  
2
TIFF  
PDF  
Selecting whether the document(s) are converted into a  
TIFF-F or PDF format when sending an Internet Fax. (The  
setting can be temporarily changed by using F8-6)  
Note: PDF file is only available if sending the  
document(s) to a PC.  
182  
SEND COMM. JNL  
*1  
2
Print  
Email  
Both  
Selecting whether the Communication Jornal is printed,  
emailed or both.  
Print : Prints  
Email : Emailed to the address selected in the Sender  
3
Both : Prints and Emailed  
1. Setting number marked with an asterisk (*) indicates the factory standard setting.  
2. This parameter supports an optional telephone service "Distinctive Ring Service" provided by  
your local telephone company. It allows up to 4 different telephone numbers to be assigned on  
a single telephone line with a distinctive ring for each telephone number. By selecting the  
appropriate ring pattern associated with the telephone number assigned for your fax machine.  
It can differentiate and answer the incoming call on the fax number. All other calls on the other  
telephone numbers will not be answered. This optional service from your local phone company  
is also called Custom Ringing, Distinctive Ringing, Ident-a-call, Ident-a-ring, Personalized  
Ringing, RingMaster, RingMate, Selective Ringing, Smart Ring or something similar. Check  
with your local telephone company on the availability of this service in your area.  
NOTE  
3. "Valid" can be selected when the SMTP server or the POP server support the capabilities.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic Operations  
Loading Documents  
Documents You Can Send  
In general, your machine will send any document printed on A4, Letter or Legal size paper.  
Document Size  
Document Thickness  
MaximumSize  
MinimumSize  
Singlesheet:  
0.0024 - 0.0060 in  
(0.06 - 0.15 mm)  
10.1 in (257 mm)  
(See Note)  
5.8 in (148 mm)  
5.0 in (128 mm)  
Multiplesheets:  
0.0024 - 0.0039in  
(0.06 - 0.10 mm)  
78.7 in (2000 mm)  
Direction  
Direction  
Note: The maximum document width that can be sent through the machine is 10.1 in (257 mm). However,  
the effective scanning width is 8.3 in (212 mm).  
Documents You Cannot Send  
You must never try to send documents that are:  
Wet  
Covered with wet ink or paste  
ABC  
Too thin (e.g., onionskin, airmail  
paper, pages from some  
magazines, etc.)  
Wrinkled, curled or folded  
Coated (e.g., glossy paper, etc.)  
Chemically processed (e.g.,  
pressure-sensitive paper, carbon-  
coated paper, etc.) or made of cloth  
or metal  
To transmit these kinds of documents, make a photocopy first and then transmit the copy instead.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Loading Documents  
How to Load Documents  
1. Be sure the document(s) is free of staples, paper clips and is not torn, greasy or covered by foreign objects.  
2. Place the document(s) FACE DOWN on the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) until the leading edge  
placed into the machine stops.  
If you are sending multiple pages, make sure that the bottom sheet enters first. You can also stack up  
to 50 Pages on the ADF at one time by staggering the documents as illustrated below. If you have  
more than 50 pages, wait until transmission or storing in memory starts as pages feed through, place any  
remaining pages on top of the last page in the feeder.  
3. Adjust the Document Guides to center the document(s) on the ADF.  
Document Guides  
INCORRECT  
CORRECT  
When you set a document on the ADF, the display message will change from date and time (standby) to  
the following message. You can now change basic transmission settings, or begin the dialing procedure.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1. The multiple page sending limitation is as follows.  
NOTE  
Document Size  
Up to 20 pages Up to 10.1 x 14.3 in (257 x 364 mm)  
Up to 50 pages* A4 or Letter size  
Document Thickness  
0.0024 - 0.0048 in  
0.0024 - 0.0039 in  
* Please note that although the size and thickness meets the specifications, you might not be  
able to set 50 pages with some types of papers.  
2. Transmitting documents longer than 14 in (356 mm) requires user's assistance.  
3. When transmitting documents longer than Letter size (8.5 x 11 in), please extend the Sub Tray  
as shown below.  
Document Sub Tray  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Transmission Settings  
General Description  
You can temporarily change the transmission settings either before or after you place the document on the  
ADF.  
These settings are as follows  
• Contrast  
• Resolution  
• Stamp  
• Communication Journal  
After your document(s) have been sent, your machine will automatically return to the preset settings.  
Contrast  
Your machine is preset to Normal contrast. If you wish to send a document with lighter contrast, change the  
setting to Lighter. If you wish to send a document with darker contrast, change the setting to Darker.  
Press  
to:  
CONTRAST  
CONTRAST = Normal  
CONTRAST = Lighter  
CONTRAST = Darker  
Resolution  
Your machine is preset to Standard resolution, which is suitable for most documents.  
If you want to send it with more detail, change the setting to Fine, Super Fine or Halftone.  
Press  
to:  
RESOLUTION  
RESOLUTION = Standard  
RESOLUTION = Super Fine  
RESOLUTION = Fine  
RESOLUTION = Halftone (Fine)  
RESOLUTION = Halftone (S-Fine)  
1. To change the preset Contrast position, change the setting of Fax Parameter No. 01. (See  
2. To change the preset Resolution position, change the setting of Fax Parameter No. 02. (See  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic Transmission Settings  
Verification Stamp  
The Verification Stamp helps you to confirm successful transmissions by stamping the bottom of each  
successfully transmitted page with a small mark.  
STAMP  
Press  
to:  
STAMP = Off  
STAMP = On  
STAMP:  
STAMP:  
ON  
OFF  
1. When you store a document in memory, the Verification Stamp will stamp on the document if it  
is successfully stored in memory. In this case the Verification Stamp is not a confirmation that  
the document was successfully transmitted. If you wish to disable the use of the Verification  
Stamp when storing document in memory, change the setting of Fax Parameter No. 28. (See  
NOTE  
2. To change the preset Verification Stamp position, change the setting of Fax Parameter No. 04.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Transmission Settings  
Communication Journal (Comm. Journal)  
A Communication Journal lets you verify if the transmission was successful. You can select the condition to  
print out the Communication Journal as follows.  
When you set COMM. JOURNAL = OFF  
:
:
a Communication Journal does not print.  
When you set COMM. JOURNAL = ON  
a Communication Journal will print automatically after every  
communication.  
When you set COMM. JOURNAL = INC  
:
a Communication Journal will print automatically only if the  
communication has failed.  
SELECT MODE  
(1-9)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
8
COMM. JOURNAL=INC  
1:OFF 2:ON 3:INC  
2
1
COMM. JOURNAL=OFF  
1:OFF 2:ON 3:INC  
1
3
for OFF (Does not print).  
for “ON” (Always prints).  
or  
or  
or  
COMM. JOURNAL=ON  
1:OFF 2:ON 3:INC  
2
3
or  
COMM. JOURNAL=INC  
1:OFF 2:ON 3:INC  
for “INCOMPLETE” (Prints only when  
communication has failed).  
4
1. To change the preset Comm. Journal condition, change the setting of Fax Parameter No. 12.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via LAN  
General Description  
Document(s) can be sent via LAN to a single or multiple email addresses. The following Email Addressing  
methods can be selected:  
• Manual Email Addressing  
• One-Touch Email Addressing  
• Abbreviated Email Addressing  
• Directory Search Email Addressing (Auto Dialer & LDAP)  
• Multiple Station Email Addressing  
The Memory Transmission mode is automatically selected by your machine if an email address is registered  
into the chosen One-Touch key(s), Program key(s), or Abbreviated Number key(s).  
The document is always stored into memory first, then the machine starts to send the email message.  
Direct Transmission, Voice Mode Transmission, and Redialing features are not available for sending  
documents via LAN.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents via LAN  
Manual Email Addressing  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
EMAIL  
ENTER EMAIL ADDRESS  
2
To choose Manual Email Addressing mode.  
Enter the full email address using the Character keys (up  
to 60 characters).  
3a  
Ex:  
a b c  
p a n a s o n  
i
c
c o m  
If you make a mistake, press  
to erase the character  
CLEAR  
then re-enter the correct character.  
abc  
Enter the User portion of the email address and press  
3b  
3c  
. The machine will complete the email address  
SET  
with the Default Domain preprogrammed in the User  
(Internet) Parameters. (i.e. will add "panasonic.com" to  
the email address)  
If you want to send to a different Domain, enter the first  
part of an email address, press  
or key to display domain names in the Selectable  
Domains List. Choose the desired domain and press  
. (See Note 3 and page 100)  
and use the  
START  
* STORE *  
NO.001  
PAGES=001 01%  
4
* STORE * COMPLETED  
TOTAL PAGE=005  
25%  
The document(s) is stored into memory with a file number.  
Then connects to the LAN and starts sending the email  
message.  
ON LINE * MEM.MXT *  
1. If your machine sounds an alarm (pi-pi-pi) in Step 2 above, this indicates that the Dialer is Full  
(more than 70 full email addresses are entered or 70 transmission reservations including G3  
communication have been already reserved).  
NOTE  
2. If the transmission cannot be completed for any reason, the email may be returned  
undelivered; otherwise no reply will be printed.  
3. For the machine to perform the email address completion the Fax Parameter No. 160  
(DEFAULT DOMAIN) must be set to "Valid" and the DEFAULT DOMAIN must be  
preprogrammed in the User (Internet) Parameters. (See page 49)  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents via LAN  
One-Touch Email Addressing  
One-Touch dialing / addressing is a fast way of dialing full telephone numbers or email addresses. To use  
these dialing or addressing methods, you must first store the telephone numbers or email addresses into  
One-Touch keys. (See page 70)  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
<01>(Station name)  
Press a One-Touch key (01 - 28).  
2
Ex:  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
If a telephone number is stored into the One-Touch key,  
the display shows:  
* STORE *  
NO.001  
PAGES=001 01%  
3
* STORE * COMPLETED  
TOTAL PAGE=005  
25%  
The document(s) is stored into memory with a file number.  
Then connects to the LAN and starts sending the email  
message.  
ON LINE * MEM.MXT *  
ID:(Station name)  
1. If your machine sounds an alarm (pi-pi-pi) in Step 2 above, this indicates that the Dialer is Full  
(more than 70 full email addresses are entered or 70 transmission reservations including G3  
communication have been already reserved).  
NOTE  
2. If the transmission cannot be completed for any reason, the email may be returned  
undelivered; otherwise no reply will be printed.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via LAN  
Abbreviated Email Addressing  
Abbreviated dialing / addressing is a fast way of dialing full telephone numbers or email addresses. To use  
these dialing or addressing methods, you must first store the telephone numbers or email addresses into  
the Auto Dialer with a 3-digit abbreviated code. (See page 72)  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
[100](Station name)  
Press  
Ex:  
and then enter a 3-digit code (001 - 100).  
ABBR  
2
1
0
0
[100](Station name)  
5553456  
If a telephone number is stored into the ABBR station, the  
display shows:  
* STORE *  
NO.001  
PAGES=001 01%  
3
* STORE * COMPLETED  
TOTAL PAGE=005  
25%  
The document(s) is stored into memory with a file number.  
Then connects to the LAN and starts sending the email  
message.  
ON LINE * MEM.MXT *  
ID:(Station name)  
1. If your machine sounds an alarm (pi-pi-pi) in Step 2 above, this indicates that the Dialer is Full  
(more than 70 full email addresses are entered or 70 transmission reservations including G3  
communication have been already reserved).  
NOTE  
2. If the transmission cannot be completed for any reason, the email may be returned  
undelivered; otherwise no reply will be printed.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via LAN  
Directory Search Dialing  
When sending via LAN, the Directory Search function allows you to dial a full email address or telephone  
number by searching for the station name or email address entered in the Auto Dialer and the LDAP  
(Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) Server.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
ENTER LETTER(S)  
2a  
To search for the station name.  
2bor  
EMAIL  
ENTER EMAIL ADDRESS  
To search for email address.  
ENTER LETTER(S)  
PANA  
Enter the full station name or part of a station name by  
using the Character keys. (See page 14)  
3a  
Ex:  
to search for PANASONIC  
P A N A  
If you make a mistake, press  
to erase the  
CLEAR  
character then re-enter the correct character.  
or  
x
Enter the full or part of an email address using the  
Character keys.  
3b  
4
Ex:  
to search for [email protected]  
x
(01)Panasonic NY002  
or  
or  
x
repeatedly until the display shows the station name and  
telephone number / email address you want to send to.  
The search priority is the LDAP Server first (retrieves up  
to 50 stations per search), then it searches the Auto  
Dialer.  
To refine your search, add additional characters to the  
searched station name / email address.  
(01)Panasonic NY002  
5
(01)Panasonic NY002  
(02)New_York@pasonic  
Use the  
to change the retrieved station's display  
format from Station Name & Email Address to Station  
Name only or to Email Address only.  
Continued on the next page...  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via LAN  
Directory Search Dialing  
* STORE *  
NO.001  
PAGES=001 01%  
6
* STORE * COMPLETED  
TOTAL PAGE=005  
25%  
The document(s) is stored into memory with a file number.  
Then connects to the LAN and starts sending the email  
message.  
ON LINE * MEM.MXT *  
ID:PANASONIC  
1. If your machine sounds an alarm (pi-pi-pi) in Step 2 above, this indicates that the Dialer is Full  
(more than 70 full email addresses are entered or 70 transmission reservations including G3  
communication have been already reserved).  
NOTE  
2. If the transmission cannot be completed for any reason, the email may be returned  
undelivered; otherwise no reply will be printed.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via LAN  
Multi-Station Transmission (Broadcasting)  
You can store the document(s) into memory and then send to multiple stations (up to 202 addresses) via  
LAN.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
Enter the email addresses by any combination of the  
following methods:  
2
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Directory Search Dialing (Auto Dialer and the LDAP),  
press  
• Manual Number Dialing, press  
station is entered (up to 70 addresses).  
after each email address is entered.  
SET  
after each  
SET  
Ex:  
<01>(Station name)  
[100](Station name)  
Ex:  
1
0
0
2 STN(S) ARE SET  
ADD MORE OR START  
If you want to confirm the number of stations you have  
entered, press  
.
SET  
* STORE *  
NO.001  
PAGES=001 01%  
3
* STORE * COMPLETED  
TOTAL PAGE=005  
25%  
The document(s) is stored into memory with a file number.  
Then connects to the LAN and starts sending the email  
message.  
ON LINE * MEM.MXT *  
1. If your machine sounds an alarm (pi-pi-pi) in Step 2 above, this indicates that the Dialer is Full  
(more than 70 full email addresses are entered or 70 transmission reservations including G3  
communication have been already reserved).  
NOTE  
2. If the transmission cannot be completed for any reason, the email may be returned  
undelivered; otherwise no reply will be printed.  
3. The unit will accept a combination of email addresses and PSTN dialing numbers.  
4. Generally, LAN transmission to multiple destinations will be completed in a single transmission  
to the SMTP server. However, when the “DELIVERY NOTICE=ON” or when using the  
DIRECT IFAX XMT modes, separate transmission is required for each destination.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via LAN  
Memory Transmission Reservation (Multi-tasking)  
If your machine is on-line busy transmitting from memory, receiving or printing received documents, you can  
reserve a transmission by the following procedure.  
Your machine is on-line, the ON LINE lamp is blinking or  
printing received documents.  
1
ON LINE * PC MODE *  
ON LINE * PRT MODE *  
ON LINE * MEM.XMT *  
ID:(Identification)  
ON LINE * RCV *  
ID:(Identification)  
* PRINTING *  
PC DATA  
* PRINTING *  
MEMORY RCV’D DOC  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
2
3
Set document(s) face down.  
Dial by any combination of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
Manual Number Dialing, press  
after each  
SET  
station is entered  
(Up to 70 stations)  
• Directory Search Dialing (Auto Dialer and the LDAP),  
press after each station is entered  
SET  
(For details, see pages 92 to 96)  
Ex:  
<01>(Station name)  
[100](Station name)  
1
0
0
2 STN(S) ARE SET  
ADD MORE OR START  
If you want to confirm the number of stations you have  
entered, press  
.
SET  
4
5
* STORE *  
NO.005  
PAGES=001 01%  
* STORE * COMPLETED  
TOTAL PAGE=005  
25%  
Your machine will store the document(s) into memory.  
1. To cancel the memory transmission reservation, see page 164.  
NOTE  
2. While the unit is displaying "WAIT TO DIAL", you can press  
connection immediately.  
to initiate the Network  
REDIAL  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via LAN  
Automatic Redialing  
WAIT TO DIAL NO.001  
(Email address)  
If the Network connection is not available or the destination device (IFax)  
is busy, the machine will retry connecting up to 5 times at 3 minutes  
interval. During that time, a message will appear as shown to the right.  
A file number is shown in the upper right hand corner of the display if it is a  
memory transmission file.  
Manual Redialing  
You can also retry connecting manually by pressing  
key.  
REDIAL  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
2
3
* STORE *  
NO.002  
PAGES=001 01%  
The document is stored into memory with a file number.  
Then the machine redials and sends to the last dialed  
email address.  
NOTE  
1. While the unit is displaying "WAIT TO DIAL", you can press  
connection immediately.  
to initiate the Network  
REDIAL  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents via LAN  
Selectable Domains  
Using the Selectable Domains feature speeds the process of completing the email address by attaching  
often used Domain Names.  
• Advance registration of up to 10 often used, domain names into the "Selectable Domains" list is required.  
Ex: To send an email to the Sales Department of Panasonic "[email protected]" using the  
"panasonic.com" domain that has been pre-registered in the Selectable Domains list, follow the steps  
below:  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
EMAIL  
ENTER EMAIL ADDRESS  
2
To choose Manual Email Addressing mode.  
sales@  
Enter the User portion of the email address using the  
Character keys.  
3
Ex:  
s a  
l
e s  
(Note: The "@" symbol indicates to the machine that a  
Domain Name will follow)  
or  
key repeatedly until the desired Selectable  
panasonic.com  
4
5
Domain Name is displayed on the LCD.  
Ex:panasonic.com  
Press  
to add the displayed Domain Name to  
SET  
the User portion of the email address.  
(If you make a mistake selecting the Domain Name,  
simply press the  
or  
key followed by  
to  
SET  
replace the selected Domain Name)  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents via LAN  
Selectable Domains  
1 STN(S) ARE SET  
ADD MORE OR START  
Press  
or  
to specify other destinations.  
SET  
6
7
The document(s) is stored into memory with a file number.  
(See Note 2)  
Then connects to the LAN and starts sending the email  
message.  
1. If the desired Domain Name is not found, press  
2. If the Fax Parameter No. 145 (SENDER SELECTION) setting is on "Valid", the Sender  
to exit the Selectable Domains List.  
CLEAR  
NOTE  
Selection screen appears after pressing in Step 7 above. Select the sender to be  
START  
added to the "From:" field on the email and press  
to start storing the document(s).  
START  
The factory default setting for this parameter is on "Invalid".  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Documents via LAN  
Internet Fax Delivery Notice (MDN)  
You can request a Message Disposition Notification (MDN) to the receiving side. If the receiving side  
supports the MDN feature, a delivery processing confirmation reply indicating that the message (email) was  
read is sent to the originator.  
The result field in your machine's Journal will indicate "OK" if the Delivery Notice is returned.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
SELECT MODE  
(1-9)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
2
3
8
DELIVERY NOTICE=OFF  
1:OFF 2:ON  
2
2
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
4
5
<01>(Station name)  
panasonic.usa@panas  
Dial by any combination of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Directory Search Dialing (Auto Dialer and the LDAP),  
press  
• Manual Number Dialing, press  
station is entered (up to 70 addresses).  
after each email address is entered.  
SET  
after each  
SET  
Ex:  
1. If you transmit to separate stations with Delivery Notice request, your machine will connect to  
the LAN for each station and request a Delivery Notice from each station.  
NOTE  
2. To change the preset Delivery Notice condition, change the setting of Fax Parameter No.173.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via LAN  
Returned Email  
When using the Internet communication mode, a failure report will print automatically for each transaction if  
the email is returned undelivered by the mail server. The printout will consist of the undelivered message  
contents supplied by the mail server and a portion of the first page’s image for that particular transaction.  
Failure Report Sample (User unknown)  
Received: from localhost (localhost) by ifeifl.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp (8.6.12/3.4W3) with  
internal id OAA24381; Sun, MMM-dd-yyyy 14:52:57 +0900  
Date: Sun, MMM-dd-yyyy 14:52:57 +0900  
From: Mail Delivery Subsystem <[email protected]>  
Subject: Returned mail: User unknown  
Message-Id: <[email protected]>  
The original message was received at Sun, MMM-dd-yyyy 14:52:54 +0900  
from nwpc31.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp [172.21.22.51]  
----- The following addresses had delivery problems -----  
<[email protected]> (unrecoverable error)  
----- Transcript of session follows -----  
.... while talking to nwr39.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp.:  
>>> RCPT To:<[email protected]>  
<<< 550 <[email protected]>... User unknown  
550 <[email protected]>... User unknown  
----- Original message follows -----  
Return-Path: [email protected]  
Received: from nwpc31.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp (Internet FAX) (nwpc31.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp [172.21  
.22.51]) by ifeifl.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp (8.6.12/3.4W3) with SMTP id OAA24380 for <error@nwr39  
.rdmg.mgcs.mei.co.jp>; Sun, MMM-dd-yyyy 14:52:54 +0900  
Message-ID: <[email protected]>  
Mime-Version: 1.0  
Content-Type: image/tiff  
Content-Transfer-Encoding: base64  
Content-Disposition: attachment; filename="image.tif"  
Content-Description: image.tif  
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, MGCS  
Date: Sun, MMM-dd-yyyy 14:49:00 +0900  
From: "DP-2000" <[email protected]>  
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX  
5
MMM-dd-yyyyy 14:49  
DX/800  
P.01/01  
MMM-dd-yyyy  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via LAN  
Using a Mailing List  
Using a Mailing List stored in the mail server simplifies the process of entering multiple locations and allows  
you to send to an unlimited number of email addresses with one easy operation.  
Ask your Network System administrator for information on how to utilize the Mailing List.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
General Description  
You can choose either Memory or Direct Transmission.  
Use Memory Transmission if:  
• You want to send the document to multiple stations.  
• You have to retrieve the document immediately.  
• You want to take advantage of Dual Operation design.  
Use Direct Transmission if:  
• The memory is full.  
• You want to send the document immediately.  
Use Voice Mode Transmit if:  
• You want to send the document after talking with the other party.  
• You want to send the document after listening to a voice prompting.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Memory Transmission  
Your machine quickly stores the document into the machine's memory.  
Then, starts to dial the telephone number.  
If the transmission fails, your machine will re-transmit the remaining unsuccessful page(s) automatically.  
1
2
3
Store document  
in memory  
Transmit  
Receive  
DestinationA  
A
A
DestinationB  
A
1. The File Number of the document being stored is shown at the upper right corner of the display  
while storing the document. It is also printed on the Communication Journal (COMM.  
JOURNAL), Transaction Journal and File List. The percentage of memory used is shown on  
the lower right corner of the display after each page is stored.  
NOTE  
* STORE *  
NO.003  
PAGES=002 10%  
* STORE * COMPLETED  
TOTAL PAGES=005 30%  
2. If memory overflow occurs while storing documents, the remaining documents on the ADF will  
be ejected. The machine prompts you whether to transmit the successfully stored documents  
or to cancel the transmission. Press  
to cancel or press  
to transmit.  
1
2
MEMORY OVERFLOW  
INFO. CODE=870  
See the Specifications on page 239 for the image memory capacity.  
If no action is taken within 10 seconds, the machine will start transmitting the stored  
documents.  
15 PAGES COMPLETED  
DELETE? 1:YES 2:NO  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Memory Transmission  
3. An Information Code will be displayed if the transmission has failed or no answer at the  
receiving side after the last automatic redial.  
The document stored for this transmission will be erased from the memory automatically and  
the information code is printed for the transmission on the Communication Journal (COMM.  
JOURNAL).  
If you need to retain the incomplete documents even after the last redial, change Fax  
Parameter No. 31 (INC. FILE SAVE) to "Valid" in advance. (See page 80) To retry the  
incomplete documents, refer to page 167.  
INCOMPLETE  
INFO. CODE=XXX  
4. To stop the transmission, press  
The display shows:  
.
STOP  
COMMUNICATION STOP ?  
1:YES 2:NO  
Press  
to stop the transmission. The document you stored will be erased automatically.  
1
If you do not want to erase the documents, change the setting of Fax Parameter No. 31 (INC.  
FILE SAVE) to "Valid" in advance. (See page 80)  
Then the following display will appear and you can select whether to save the file as an  
incomplete file for editing and retry, or delete the file manually.  
SAVE AS INCOMP.FILE?  
1:YES 2:NO  
5. If you would like to print a Communication Journal (COMM. JOURNAL) after stopping a  
transmission, press  
when the display shows:  
1
PRINT COMM. JOURNAL?  
1:YES 2:NO  
6. If the file memory capacity reaches 70 files and you try to store another file, the following  
display appears and the machine will not accept additional files until a file is completed and  
becomes available.  
FILE STORAGE IS FULL  
PLEASE WAIT!  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Memory Transmission  
Manual Number Dialing  
To dial the telephone number manually, follow the steps below.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
TEL. NO.  
Enter a telephone number from the keypad.  
(Up to 36 digits)  
5551234  
2
You can also designate more that one destination.  
Ex:  
5 5 5 1 2 3 4  
* STORE *  
NO.002  
PAGES=001 05%  
3
* DIALING *  
5551234  
NO.002  
The document is stored into memory with a file number.  
Then starts dialing the telephone number immediately  
after storing the first page. (See Note 3)  
The remaining page(s) continue to store into memory.  
1. If you need a special access number to get an outside line, dial it first then press  
enter a pause (represented by a "-") before dialing the full number.  
Ex: 9 PAUSE 5551234  
to  
PAUSE  
NOTE  
2. If you are using Pulse dialing and you wish to change to Tone dialing in the middle of dialing,  
press (represented by a "/").  
The dialing mode will be changed from Pulse to Tone after dialing the digit "/".  
Ex: 9 PAUSE * 5551234  
3. This feature is called “Quick Memory Transmission”. If you wish to store all the document(s)  
into memory first before transmitting, change the Fax Parameter No. 82 (QUICK MEMORY  
XMT) to “Invalid”. (See page 82)  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Memory Transmission  
One-Touch Dialing  
One-Touch Dialing allows you to dial a full telephone number by pressing a single key. To set up the One-  
Touch keys, see page 70.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
Press a One-Touch key.  
Ex:  
2
3
* STORE *  
NO.002  
PAGES=001 05%  
The document is stored into memory with a file number.  
Then starts dialing the telephone number immediately  
after storing the first page. (See Note 1)  
* DIALING *  
(Station name)  
NO.002  
The remaining page(s) continue to store into memory.  
Abbreviated Dialing  
Abbreviated dialing is a speedy way to dial a frequently dialed telephone number by preprogramming the  
telephone number into the built-in auto-dialer with a 3-digit abbreviated code. To program an abbreviated  
dialing number, see page 72.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
[010](Station name)  
5553456  
Press  
Ex:  
then enter a 3-digit code.  
ABBR  
2
3
0
1
0
* STORE *  
NO.002  
PAGES=001 05%  
* DIALING *  
NO.002  
The document is stored into memory with a file number.  
Then starts dialing the telephone number immediately  
after storing the first page. (See Note 1)  
(Station name)  
The remaining page(s) continue to store into memory.  
1. This feature is called “Quick Memory Transmission”. If you wish to store all the document(s)  
into memory first before transmitting, change the Fax Parameter No. 82 (QUICK MEMORY  
XMT) to “Invalid”. (See page 82)  
NOTE  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Memory Transmission  
Directory Search Dialing  
Directory Search dialing allows you to dial a full telephone number by searching the station name entered in  
One-Touch keys or Abbreviated dialing numbers.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
ENTER LETTER(S)  
2
ENTER LETTER(S)  
PANA  
Enter the full station name or part of a station name by  
using the Character keys. (See page 14)  
3
4
Ex:  
for searching PANASONIC  
P A N A  
(01)PANASONIC  
5553456  
or  
repeatedly until the display shows the station name you  
want to send to.  
* STORE *  
NO.002  
PAGES=001 05%  
5
* DIALING *  
PANASONIC  
NO.002  
The document is stored into memory with a file number.  
Then starts dialing the telephone number immediately  
after storing the first page. (See Note 1)  
The remaining page(s) continue to store into memory.  
1. This feature is called “Quick Memory Transmission”. If you wish to store all the document(s)  
into memory first before transmitting, change the Fax Parameter No. 82 (QUICK MEMORY  
XMT) to “Invalid”. (See page 82)  
NOTE  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Memory Transmission  
Multi-Station Transmission (Broadcasting)  
If you have to send the same document(s) to multiple stations, you can save time in feeding the  
document(s) by using memory transmission. That is, you can store the document(s) into memory and then  
send it to the station(s) automatically.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
Dial by any combination of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
2
Manual Number Dialing, press  
after each  
SET  
station is entered  
(Up to 70 stations)  
• Directory Search Dialing (Auto Dialer and the LDAP),  
• press after each station is entered  
SET  
(For details, see pages 108 to 110.)  
Ex:  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
[010](Station name)  
5553456  
0
1
0
2 STN(S) ARE SET  
ADD MORE OR START  
If you want to confirm the number of stations you have  
entered, press  
.
SET  
* STORE *  
NO.001  
PAGES=001 01%  
3
* STORE * COMPLETED  
TOTAL PAGE=005  
25%  
The document is stored into memory with a file number.  
Then starts dialing the telephone numbers in sequence.  
* DIALING *  
(Station name)  
NO.001  
1. You can review the stations you entered in Step 3 before storing your document into memory  
by pressing or . Press to clear an entered station or group shown on the  
display if needed.  
NOTE  
CLEAR  
2. The Quick Memory Transmission” is disabled if multiple stations are set.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Direct Transmission  
If your machine's memory is full or you wish to send the document immediately, use Direct Transmission.  
Manual Number Dialing (Direct Transmission)  
To dial the telephone number manually, follow the steps below.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
MEMORY XMT=ON  
1:OFF 2:ON  
2
8
9
ENTER STATION  
00%  
3
1
PRESS START TO DIAL  
5551234  
Enter a telephone number from the keypad.  
Ex:  
4
5
5 5 5 1 2 3 4  
* DIALING *  
5551234  
Your machine starts to dial the telephone number.  
1. If you need a special access number to get an outside line, dial it first then press  
enter a pause (represented by a "-") before dialing the full number.  
Ex: 9 PAUSE 5551234  
to  
PAUSE  
NOTE  
2. If you are using Pulse dialing and you wish to change to Tone dialing in the middle of dialing,  
press (represented by a "/").  
The dialing mode will be changed from Pulse to Tone after dialing the digit "/".  
Ex: 9 PAUSE * 5551234  
3. To stop the transmission, press  
The display shows:  
.
STOP  
COMMUNICATION STOP ?  
1:YES 2:NO  
1
Press  
to stop the transmission. The Communication Journal will not print out regardless of  
the printout mode setting of the Communication Journal.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Direct Transmission  
One-Touch Dialing (Direct Transmission)  
One-Touch Dialing allows you to dial a full telephone number by pressing a single key. To set up the One-  
Touch keys, see page 70.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
MEMORY XMT=ON  
1:OFF 2:ON  
2
8
9
ENTER STATION  
00%  
3
4
1
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
Press a One-Touch key.  
Ex:  
* DIALING *  
(Station name)  
The display will show the One-Touch number and station  
name. The full number (e.g. 5551234) will then be dialed.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Direct Transmission  
Abbreviated Dialing (Direct Transmission)  
Abbreviated dialing is a speedy way to dial a frequently dialed telephone number by preprogramming the  
telephone number into the built-in auto-dialer with a 3-digit abbreviated code. To program an abbreviated  
dialing number, see page 72.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
MEMORY XMT=ON  
1:OFF 2:ON  
2
8
9
ENTER STATION  
00%  
3
4
1
[010](Station name)  
5553456  
Press  
Ex:  
and a 3-digit code.  
ABBR  
0
1
0
* DIALING *  
(Station name)  
The display will show the ABBR number and station  
name.  
The full number (e.g. 5553456) will then be dialed.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Direct Transmission  
Directory Search Dialing (Direct Transmission)  
Directory Search dialing allows you to dial a full telephone number by searching the station name entered in  
One-Touch keys or Abbreviated dialing numbers.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
MEMORY XMT=ON  
1:OFF 2:ON  
2
8
9
ENTER STATION  
00%  
3
4
1
ENTER LETTER(S)  
ENTER LETTER(S)  
Enter the full station name or part of a station name by  
using the Character keys. (See page 14)  
PANA  
5
6
Ex:  
for searching PANASONIC  
P A N A  
(01)PANASONIC  
5553456  
or  
repeatedly until the display shows the station name you  
want to send to.  
* DIALING *  
PANASONIC  
7
The full number (e.g. 5553456) will be dialed.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Voice Mode Transmission  
If you wish to send the document after talking with other party, use Voice Mode Transmission. Your machine  
requires an optional fax handset or an external telephone.  
Off-Hook Dialing  
For Off-Hook Dialing, follow the steps below.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
* PHONE OFF HOOK *  
* DIALING *  
Lift the fax handset or the external telephone and dial the  
telephone number from the keypad.  
2
3
Ex:  
5 5 5 1 2 3 4  
5551234  
ON LINE * XMT *  
When you hear the voice of the other party, tell the other  
party to prepare to receive a document.  
Then, when you hear a beep,  
and hang up the handset.  
1. To stop the transmission, press  
The display shows:  
.
STOP  
NOTE  
COMMUNICATION STOP ?  
1:YES 2:NO  
1
Press  
to stop the transmission. The Communication Journal will not print out regardless of  
the printout mode setting of the Communication Journal.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Voice Mode Transmission  
On-Hook Dialing  
For On-Hook Dialing, follow the steps below.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
* MONITOR *  
2
You will hear dial tone through the monitor speaker.  
Dial the telephone number from the keypad.  
* DIALING *  
5551234  
3
4
Ex:  
5 5 5 1 2 3 4  
ON LINE * XMT *  
When you hear a beep,  
1. If you need a special access number to get an outside line, dial it first then press  
enter a pause (represented by a "-") before dialing the full number.  
Ex: 9 PAUSE 5551234  
to  
PAUSE  
NOTE  
2. If you are using Pulse dialing and you wish to change to Tone dialing in the middle of dialing,  
press (represented by a "/").  
The dialing mode will be changed from Pulse to Tone after dialing the digit "/".  
Ex: 9 PAUSE * 5551234  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Transmission Reservation  
You can do the following while sending a document from memory or receiving a document.  
• Reserve the next transmission into memory. (Up to 70 different files)  
• Reserve a priority transmission.  
Memory Transmission Reservation (Multi-tasking)  
If your machine is on-line busy transmitting from memory, receiving or printing received documents, you can  
reserve a transmission by the following procedure.  
Your machine is on-line, the ON LINE lamp is blinking or  
printing received documents.  
1
ON LINE * PC MODE *  
ON LINE * PRT MODE *  
ON LINE * MEM.XMT *  
ID:(Identification)  
ON LINE * RCV *  
ID:(Identification)  
* PRINTING *  
PC DATA  
* PRINTING *  
MEMORY RCV’D DOC  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
2
3
Set document(s) face down.  
Dial by any combination of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
Manual Number Dialing, press  
after each  
SET  
station is entered  
(Up to 70 stations)  
• Directory Search Dialing (Auto Dialer and the LDAP),  
press after each station is entered  
SET  
(For details, see pages 108 to 110.)  
Ex:  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
[010](Station name)  
5553456  
0
1
0
If you want to confirm the number of stations you have  
entered, press  
.
SET  
* STORE *  
NO.005  
PAGES=001 01%  
4
* STORE * COMPLETED  
TOTAL PAGE=005  
25%  
Your machine will store the document(s) into memory.  
1. To cancel the memory transmission reservation, see page 164.  
NOTE  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Transmission Reservation  
Direct Transmission Reservation (Priority Transmission Reservation)  
If you are in a rush to send an urgent document, however there are many files in the memory, use Direct  
Transmission Reservation to send the urgent document. The urgent document will be sent immediately  
after the current communication is finished.  
Note that you cannot send documents to multiple stations.  
To reserve your machine for sending the urgent documents  
Your machine is on-line, the ON LINE lamp is blinking or  
printing received documents.  
1
ON LINE * PC MODE *  
ON LINE * PRT MODE *  
ON LINE * MEM.XMT *  
ID:(Identification)  
ON LINE * RCV *  
ID:(Identification)  
* PRINTING *  
PC DATA  
* PRINTING *  
MEMORY RCV’D DOC  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
2
3
Set document(s) face down.  
MEMORY XMT=ON  
1:OFF 2:ON  
8
9
ENTER STATION  
00%  
4
5
1
Dial by using any one of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Manual Number Dialing and press  
START  
• Directory Search Dialing (Auto Dialer and the LDAP)  
and press  
START  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
(For details, see pages 112 to 115.)  
Ex:  
You can reserve sending an urgent document to a  
single station only.  
A message “DIRECT XMT RESERVED” will be  
shown on the display.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Transmission Reservation  
To cancel the direct transmission reservation  
DIRECT XMT RESERVED  
<01>(Station name)  
Make sure the document is on the ADF.  
1
2
CANCEL XMT RESERVE ?  
1:YES 2:NO  
1
3
and then remove the document from ADF.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Redialing  
Automatic Redialing  
WAIT TO DIAL NO.001  
<01>(Station name)  
If a busy line is detected, the machine will redial the number up to 5 times  
at 3 minutes interval. However, if a busy line is not detected, the machine  
will redial only one time. During that time, a message will appear as  
shown to the right.  
A file number is shown in the upper right hand corner of the display if it is a  
memory transmission file.  
Manual Redialing  
You can also redial the last dialed number manually by pressing  
key.  
REDIAL  
To redial the last dialed number through memory  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
TEL. NO.  
5551234  
2
3
* STORE *  
NO.002  
PAGES=001 01%  
* DIALING *  
5551234  
NO.002  
The document is stored into memory with a file number.  
Then dials the last dialed number.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Documents via Telephone Line  
Redialing  
To redial the last dialed number through ADF  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
MEMORY XMT=ON  
1:OFF 2:ON  
2
8
9
ENTER STATION  
00%  
3
4
1
PRESS START TO DIAL  
5551234  
* DIALING *  
5551234  
Your machine starts to dial the last dialed number.  
NOTE  
1. While the unit is displaying "WAIT TO DIAL", you can press  
immediately.  
to start redialing  
REDIAL  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving Documents via LAN  
General Description  
Your machine offers you a choice to receive Fax documents unattended (by default) or manually over  
regular telephone lines.  
Your machine also offers the same choice to receive and print Internet email messages via LAN unattended  
or manually when subscribing to a POP mail server. However, when your machine is configured to receive  
email using SMTP protocol, the email can only be received and printed unattended.  
Internet Fax Received on a PC  
Figure 1: Outlook Express Inbox Sample  
mm/dd/yy 3:15 PM  
mm/dd/yy 3:17 PM  
mm/dd/yy 3:18 PM  
mm/dd/yy 3:19 PM  
mm/dd/yy 3:20 PM  
mm/dd/yy 3:21 PM  
mm/dd/yy 3:21 PM  
• The "Subject" column in the above example shows samples of email messages received on a PC from  
your machine, and Internet FAX.  
• For your reference, the above example is from Outlook Express Inbox running under Microsoft® Windows  
95®. If you are using a different email application software, please refer to your application’s User Manual.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receiving Documents via LAN  
General Description  
Figure 2: Internet Fax Received on a PC  
Month, dd, yyyy  
http://panasonic.co.jp/pcc/en/  
• For your reference, the above example is from Windows Messaging running under Microsoft® Windows  
95®.  
To run the Viewer, please refer to your application’s User Manual. The attached file is composed of TIFF-  
F (Tagged Image File Format with Modified Hoffman coded image). TIFF Viewers come in many flavors, a  
majority of TIFF Viewers will open and view this file, however, a handful of Viewers may not support this  
format.  
• You can download the TIFF-F Image Viewer into your PC from the following URL addresses:  
http://panasonic.co.jp/pcc/en/  
• License agreement of Panasonic’s TIFF-F Image Viewer application  
You must carefully read the license agreement before installing the TIFF-F Image Viewer application on  
your PC. If you do not agree to all the terms of this agreement, do not use the software and destroy all of  
the copies thereof.  
You must assume full responsibility for selection of the software and its operation/non-operation and  
results obtained therefrom.  
• If you receive an email (Internet Fax) with a PDF file formatted attachment, the following text message is  
shown in the Email body.  
An image data in PDF format has been attached to this email.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving Documents via LAN  
Receiving Email from a POP Server  
Your machine offers a choice to receive and print Internet email messages via LAN unattended or manually  
when subscribing to a POP mail server.  
Setting the POP Parameters  
Set the parameters pertinent to the POP server (Fax Parameters No. 146 to 149).  
No. 146 (POP TIMER): Enter the interval to check and retrieve email from the POP server (0 to 60 minutes).  
If "0 minutes" is entered, the POP server is not checked for mail.  
No. 147 (AUTO POP RCV): When there is mail to be retrieved from the POP server, your machine will  
retrieve it and print the email unattended. If this parameter is set to "1:Invalid", the machine will not retrieve  
it, but displays the number of mails on the POP server.  
No. 148 (DEL POP RCV MAIL): Select whether the email is deleted from the POP server after it is retrieved  
by your machine.  
No. 149 (DEL POP ERR MAIL): Select whether to delete the email from the POP server when the file  
attachment format is not supported.  
To set the above POP parameters, follow the steps below.  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
4
1
146 POP TIMER  
3
min. (0-60)  
3
6
4
146 POP TIMER  
Enter the desired download interval (0 to 60 minutes).  
Ex:  
5
min. (0-60)  
4
5
0 5  
If you make a mistake, press  
to erase the digit  
CLEAR  
and then re-enter the correct value.  
147 AUTO POP RCV  
2:VALID  
147 AUTO POP RCV  
2:VALID  
for “INVALID”  
for “VALID”  
1
6
or  
2
Continued on the next page...  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receiving Documents via LAN  
Receiving Email from a POP Server  
148 DEL POP RCV MAIL  
2:VALID  
7
148 DEL POP RCV MAIL  
2:VALID  
for “INVALID”  
for “VALID”  
1
8
or  
2
149 DEL POP ERR MAIL  
1:INVALID  
9
149 DEL POP ERR MAIL  
1:INVALID  
for “INVALID”  
for “VALID”  
1
10  
or  
2
150 IFAX RET RECEIPT  
1:INVALID  
11  
12  
1. When an unsupported file attachment is received, an error message is printed to inform you  
that the file attachment could not be printed.  
NOTE  
2. When Fax Parameter No. 148 (DEL POP RCV MAIL) and/or Fax Parameter No. 149 (DEL  
POP ERR MAIL) are set to 1:Invalid, email with errors will not be erased. This will allow you to  
retrieve this email from your PC later.  
Furthermore, if these Fax Parameters are set to "1:Invalid", you will need to delete mails from  
the POP server periodically. POP servers allocate a certain amount of space per account and if  
mail is not deleted regularly, your mail box will overflow and new incoming mail will be rejected.  
Either retrieve these mails from your PC or set the Fax Parameters to "2:Valid" triggering your  
machine to receive, print and delete all the mails from the POP server. This procedure,  
however, might cause mail that had been printed before to print again.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving Documents via LAN  
Receiving Email from a POP Server  
Unattended Reception from the POP Server  
When the Fax Parameter No. 146 (POP TIMER) is set to a value between 1 and 60 minutes, and Fax  
Parameter No. 147 (AUTO POP RCV) is set to "2:Valid", the machine will query the POP server at the  
specified interval for new mail.  
Any mail on the POP server is retrieved and printed unattended.  
1 NEW MAIL(S)  
When the Fax Parameter No. 146 (POP TIMER) is set to "0", the machine will not query the POP server and  
the mail is not retrieved automatically. With this setting, mail must be retrieved manually from the POP  
server.  
MAR-12-2002 17:15  
<NEW MAIL(S)>  
When the Fax Parameter No. 147 (AUTO POP RCV) is set to "1:Invalid", the machine will query the POP  
server for new mail at the interval specified by Fax Parameter No. 146. If new mail has arrived at POP  
server, the machine will not retrieve it, but displays the number of mails on the POP server.  
Manual Reception from the POP Server  
To receive manually from the POP server, follow the steps below:  
MMM-dd-yyyy 17:15  
00%  
1
or  
MMM-dd-yyyy 17:15  
<NEW MAIL(S)>  
NO NEW MAIL  
If the POP server has not received any new mail, the  
following message is displayed.  
2
3
ON LINE * RCV *  
If POP server received new mail, the machine will display  
the number of mails on the server, then receive and print  
the email.  
1. If you program a user name and password in the Program key, you can receive mail from the  
POP server using a user name other than the name set as the user parameter.  
NOTE  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving Documents via Telephone Line  
Reception Modes  
You can select one of the four modes as shown below.  
Conditions  
Suggested Reception Mode  
Telephone Mode  
Settings  
You normally receive  
only voice calls.  
Fax Parameter No. 17 set to 1:  
Tel.  
You can answer the incoming call via an External  
Telephone (Optional). If you receive a fax calling  
signal, simply press START to receive manually.  
MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00  
RCV MODE=TEL  
00%  
You receive both voice Fax / Tel Auto Switching Mode  
and fax calls.  
Fax Parameter No. 17 set to 3:  
Fax / Tel SW.  
Unit will answer the incoming call then  
MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00  
RCV MODE=FAX/TEL 00%  
distinguishes whether it is voice or fax call. If it is a  
fax call, the unit will receive automatically. if it is a  
voice call, the unit will signal (Ring) through the  
speaker for your attention. (See page 130)  
You normally receive  
fax calls only.  
Fax Mode  
Fax Parameter No. 17 set to 2:  
Fax.  
Unit will receive the document automatically. All  
incoming calls (including a voice call) are  
answered by the fax machine. (See page 131)  
MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00  
00%  
You receive both voice TAM Interface Mode  
and fax calls and a  
Fax Parameter No. 17 set to 4:  
TAM / FAX.  
Telephone Answering  
Machine (TAM) is  
connected.  
The TAM answers the incoming call. During that  
MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00  
RCV MODE=TAM/FAX 00%  
time, the unit also monitors whether it is a voice  
call, the TAM continues to operate. If it is a fax  
call, the unit will automatically switch the line to  
the Fax and begin receiving document.  
1. Depending on the model of the Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) that is connected, some  
of the features may not be compatible with your fax machine operating in the TAM Interface  
mode.  
NOTE  
2. If you are using the "Distinctive Ring Service" provided by your local telephone company,  
please note that the ring pattern for your fax number must match with the setting of Fax  
Parameter No. 36 (RING PATTERN DETECT). (See page 81)  
If the setting does not match with the ring pattern, your machine will not receive a document  
automatically and the telephone will continue to ring.  
Furthermore, if your TAM does not support the "Distinctive Ring Detector" service, it may not  
function properly in TAM Interface.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receiving Documents via Telephone Line  
Telephone Mode  
When your machine is set to this mode, your machine will not receive documents automatically. If you  
receive a fax call, follow the procedure below to receive documents manually.  
Setting the Telephone Mode  
Change Fax Parameter No. 17 (RECEIVE MODE) to 1: TEL.  
1
Operation of Telephone Mode  
When your telephone rings, lift the handset of the External  
Telephone.  
1
If you hear a beep from the phone, it means someone  
wants to send a fax. Or, if the caller answers and says he/  
she wants to send a fax, then...  
Remove any document from the ADF.  
2
If you answered the call using the External Telephone,  
3a  
If you answered the call on an Extension phone,  
3b  
or  
within 1 second from the telephone key  
pad. (See Note 1)  
Your machine will be activated remotely.  
Hang up the phone.  
4
1. This procedure is called "REMOTE RCV" and will only work on a touch tone phone. If your  
NOTE  
extension phone is not a touch tone phone, press  
machine.  
on the control panel of your fax  
START  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receiving Documents via Telephone Line  
Fax / Tel Auto Switching Mode  
When your machine is set to this mode, your machine will switch to document reception or voice  
communication automatically.  
Setting the Fax / Tel Auto Switching Mode  
Change Fax Parameter No. 17 (RECEIVE MODE) to 3: FAX/TEL.  
1
Operation of Fax / Tel Auto Switching Mode  
If it is a Fax call,  
Your machine will answer the call when a call is received,  
then distinguish whether it is a voice or fax call.  
1
Your machine begins to receive the documents.  
2
If it is a Voice call,  
Your machine will answer the call when a call is received,  
then distinguish whether it is a voice or fax call.  
1
Your machine begins to signal (Ringing) through the  
machine's speaker for your attention. (See Note 1)  
2
Lift the handset of the External Telephone and press  
3
.
STOP  
Begin the conversation.  
4
1. The length of time the machine signals can be changed by Fax Parameter No.18 (OP CALL  
NOTE  
2. To adjust the Ringer Volume refer to page 43.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Receiving Documents via Telephone Line  
Fax Mode  
When your machine is set to this mode, it will immediately begin to receive documents automatically when a  
call is received.  
Setting the Fax Mode  
Change Fax Parameter No. 17 (RECEIVE MODE) to 2: FAX.  
1
Operation of Fax Mode  
Your machine will begin receiving automatically when a fax call is received.  
TAM (Telephone Answering Machine) Interface Mode  
Your machine is equipped with a unique feature called TAM Interface which enables it to automatically  
switch a single telephone line either to Fax or TAM. You can connect most TAMs in the market to your  
machine and use your existing telephone line very efficiently. However, some TAMs may not be compatible  
with this machine. Answering Services (Voice Mail) provided by your Local Phone company are not  
compatible with this feature. For the operation of your TAM, please refer to the User's Guide of the TAM.  
Installing your TAM  
1. Remove the telephone line cable of your  
1
TAM from the wall jack.  
2. Plug the telephone line cable of your  
TAM into the TEL jack on the rear of the  
fax machine as shown.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Receiving Documents via Telephone Line  
TAM (Telephone Answering Machine) Interface Mode  
Setting the TAM Interface Mode  
Change Fax Parameter No. 17 (RECEIVE MODE) to 4: TAM/FAX.  
1
Operation of TAM Interface Mode  
If it is a Fax call,  
When your TAM and Fax receives an incoming call, the  
TAM always answers the call first and then the TAM plays  
1
the OGM (Outgoing Message) recorded in your TAM to  
the calling station. During the time the TAM is answering  
the call, your fax machine will be monitoring the line to  
distinguish whether it is a voice or fax call.  
Your machine will switch the line to the fax and then begin  
to receive the documents immediately from the calling  
station.  
2
If it is a Voice call,  
When your TAM and Fax receives an incoming call, the  
TAM always answers the call first and then the TAM plays  
1
the OGM (Outgoing Message) recorded in your TAM to  
the calling station. During the time the TAM is answering  
the call, your fax machine will be monitoring the line to  
distinguish whether it is a voice or fax call.  
Your TAM continues to record a message (ICM) after  
playing the OGM.  
2
Sample of OGM  
Hello, this is Smith. Sorry I am unable to take your call. Please leave your message after the beep or if you are  
calling to send a fax, press the asterisk button twice on your touch tone phone now and start your machine. Thank  
you for calling.  
Silent Detection Mode  
Enables your Fax machine to switch to the Fax Mode when receiving from units that do not send fax signal (short  
beep) and prevents your TAM from recording blank (long silence) incoming message.  
To activate this feature,  
1. Change Fax Parameter No. 20 (SILENT DET.) to 2 : Valid. (See page 80)  
2. Set the time length of the OGM recorded in your TAM with the Fax Parameter No. 19 (OGM LENGTH). (See  
[We recommend to set the time length 5 or 6 seconds longer than the actual time length of the OGM.]  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving Documents via Telephone Line  
Print Reduction  
This machine can use Letter, Legal or A4 size plain paper for recording. Sometimes, oversized documents  
sent to you by the other parties cannot be printed within a single page. When this occurs, the document will  
be divided into separate pages.  
This machine is equipped with a Print Reduction function to solve this problem. You may select the most  
appropriate setting from the selections described below.  
1. Automatic Reduction  
Each page of a received document is first stored in memory. Based on the document length, your  
machine will automatically calculate the suitable reduction ratio (70% to 100%) to print the entire  
document on a single page. If the received document is extremely long (over 39% longer than the  
recording paper), the document will be divided into separate pages and print without reduction.  
2. Fixed Reduction  
You can pre-determine the reduction ratio from 70% to 100% in 1% steps. The document(s) you receive  
will be reduced to the fixed ratio regardless of size.  
Selecting the Print Reduction Mode  
Set Fax Parameters as shown below. (See page 80)  
1. To set Automatic Reduction mode.  
1) No. 24 Print Reduction set to “Auto”.  
2. To set Fixed Reduction mode.  
1) No. 24 Print Reduction set to “Fixed”.  
2) No. 25 Reduction Ratio set to any number between 70% through 100%. (See Note 1)  
Ex:A4 to A4  
A4 to Letter  
- 96%  
- 90%  
- 96%  
- 75%  
Letter to Letter  
Legal to Letter  
1. If the sending side is set to print the header on the outside of the copy area, more reduction  
ratio will be required.  
NOTE  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Receiving Documents via Telephone Line  
Receiving Oversize Documents  
If the received document is extremely long (over 39% longer than the recording paper), the document will be  
divided into separate pages. When printing on separate pages, the bottom 0.4 in (10 mm) of first page will  
be overlapped on top of the next page.  
Transmitted Document  
Received Document  
Overlap print.  
0.4 in (10 mm)  
The receiving document is divided  
into two sheets with overlap printing.  
1. If the reduction method is set to the Automatic Reduction mode, the document is printed out  
with no reduction when printing out separate pages. If the reduction method is set to Fixed  
Reduction mode, the document is printed out by the ratio you set in Fax Parameter No. 25.  
NOTE  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receiving Documents via Telephone Line  
Substitute Memory Reception  
If the recording paper runs out or jams or if the toner runs out during reception, the machine automatically  
starts receiving documents into its image data memory. Stored documents are printed automatically after  
replacing the recording paper or the toner cartridge. (See Note 1 and 2)  
NO RECORDING PAPER  
INFO. CODE=010  
When the machine finishes the memory reception and  
there is no recording paper or toner, an Information Code  
appears on the display.  
1
2
OUT OF TONER  
INFO. CODE=041  
Install the recording paper (See page 36) or replace the  
toner cartridge (See page 34).  
* PRINTING *  
MEMORY RCV’D DOC  
The machine will automatically start printing the document  
stored in the memory.  
Print Collation Mode  
The printing mechanism of your machine is a Reverse Order Stacking construction. Your machine has a  
Print Collation Mode that stacks received documents in the correct order. When the Print Collation Mode is  
enabled, all received documents are stored into memory first, then printed out in Correct Order Stacking.  
The requirements for the Print Collation Mode to be active are; 1) Fax Parameter No. 65 PRINT  
COLLATION set to “Valid”, and 2) enough remaining memory.  
The unit will print in Reverse Order Stacking (Non-Collation Mode) whenever one of the above requirements  
is not met.  
To use this function, we recommend installing an Optional Flash Memory Card. See page 242 (Options and  
Supplies).  
Sending Document Order  
Stacking Document Order  
Correct Order Stacking  
Reverse Order Stacking  
(Non-Collation Mode)  
(Collation Mode)  
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
2
1
1. If the memory overflows, the machine will stop receiving and release the communication line.  
The document(s) stored in the memory up to that moment will be printed out.  
2. If you wish to turn off the substitute reception function, change the setting of Fax Parameter  
No. 22 to "Invalid". (See page 80)  
NOTE  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Making Copies  
Your machine has a copy function which can make single or multiple copies.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
COPY  
NO. OF COPY=1  
2
COPY  
Enter the number of copies (max. 99).  
NO. OF COPY=10  
3
Ex:  
1 0  
* STORE *  
NO.005  
PAGES=001 01%  
4
* COPY *  
NO. OF COPY=01/10  
The machine stores the document, then prints the copies.  
1. The copy will be reduced automatically depending on the length of the original document. If  
you wish to be prompted for the reduction ratio when making copies, change the setting of Fax  
Parameter No. 32 (COPY REDUCTION) to "Manual". (See page 81)  
NOTE  
If Copy Reduction is set to Manual, press  
to 70%)  
and  
to set the zoom ratio in 1% steps. (100%  
2. If you make a copy with Super Fine resolution, it will be reduced slightly even if the reduction  
ratio is set to 100% in order to fit the data on one page.  
3. You can change the Contrast and Resolution without Standard Resolution in Copy Mode.  
4. If you experience a memory overflow error while making copies, you may turn “Off” the  
Memory XMT feature temporarily by pressing  
the printed copies will not be collated.  
. However,  
FUNCTION  
SET  
8 9  
1
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Features  
Timer Controlled Communications  
General Description  
You can send a document to one or multiple stations at any preset time within the next 24 hours.  
Up to 70 built-in timers can be set for deferred transmission and deferred polling.  
Deferred Transmission  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
DEFERRED COMM. (1-2)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
2
1
DEFERRED XMT  
START TIME  
:
3
1
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START  
Enter the start time from the keypad.  
(Use a 4-digit, 24-hour clock)  
4
5
Ex:  
(11:30 p.m.) and  
2 3 3 0  
SET  
Dial by any combination of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
Manual Number Dialing, press  
after each  
after each  
SET  
SET  
station is entered  
(Up to 70 stations)  
• Directory Search Dialing, press  
station is entered  
(For details, see pages 108 to 110.)  
Ex:  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
* STORE *  
NO.002  
PAGES=001 05%  
6
* STORE * COMPLETED  
TOTAL PAGES=005 30%  
to store documents into the memory.  
1. If you enter a wrong number in Step 4, press  
2. To change or cancel the Deferred Communication settings, see pages 162 and 164.  
3. When you reserve a deferred transmission without storing a document into memory, the  
then re-enter the right number.  
CLEAR  
NOTE  
following message will be shown on the display after pressing  
in the last step.  
START  
DEF DIRECT XMT RSV’D  
<01>(Station name)  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Timer Controlled Communications  
Deferred Polling  
DEFERRED COMM. (1-2)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
1
DEFERRED POLLING  
START TIME  
:
2
2
DEFERRED POLLING  
PASSWORD=❚❚❚❚  
Enter the start time from the keypad.  
(Use a 4-digit, 24-hour clock)  
3
Ex:  
(3:30 a.m.) and  
0 3 3 0  
Enter a 4-digit polling password.  
Ex: and  
SET  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START  
4
5
9 8 7 6  
SET  
Dial by any combination of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
Manual Number Dialing, press  
after each  
after each  
SET  
SET  
station is entered  
(Up to 70 stations)  
• Directory Search Dialing, press  
station is entered  
(For details, see pages 108 to 110.)  
Ex:  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
* STORE *  
NO.001  
6
1. If you enter a wrong number in Step 3, press  
2. To change or cancel the Deferred Communication settings, see pages 162 and 164.  
, then re-enter the right number.  
CLEAR  
NOTE  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Polling  
General Description  
Polling means calling other station(s) to retrieve a document. The other station must know in advance that  
you will call and must have a document set on the ADF or stored in the memory. You may need to set a  
polling password, shared by the other station, to ensure security.  
Setting the Polling Password  
If the polling password does not match with the polled station, your polling request will be refused  
automatically.  
To set the polling password, follow the steps below.  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
4
2
26 POLLING PASSWORD  
❚❚❚❚  
3
6
26 POLLING PASSWORD  
1234  
Enter a 4-digit polling password.  
Ex:  
4
5
1 2 3 4  
1. Polling might not function with all fax machines. We suggest you attempt a trial polling before  
you actually poll important documents.  
NOTE  
2. If a password is not set in the polled station, you may poll the other station even though your  
machine has a password.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Polling  
Preparing to be Polled  
In order to let other stations poll your machine, you must prepare your machine with a document stored in  
memory. Be sure to set the polling password before storing the document into memory. After being polled,  
the documents stored in the memory will be erased automatically. To retain the documents in memory so  
that they can be polled repeatedly change Fax Parameter No. 27 (POLLED FILE SAVE) to "Valid".  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
POLLING  
NO.=❚  
1:POLLING 2:POLLED  
2
3
3
POLLED  
PASSWORD=1234  
2
POLLED  
Enter a 4-digit polling password. (See Note 3)  
Ex:  
PASSWORD=4321  
4
5
4 3 2 1  
* STORE *  
NO.015  
PAGES=001 01%  
* STORE * COMPLETED  
TOTAL PAGES=005 24%  
The document(s) will be stored into memory.  
1. You can still send or receive documents even when set to be polled.  
2. Only 1 polled file can be stored in memory. If you need to add document(s) into the same  
polled file, see page 166.  
NOTE  
3. If you have set the polling password in Fax Parameter No. 26, the password will appear on the  
display. You can still change the password temporarily by overwriting it with a new one.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Polling  
Polling Documents from Another Station  
The following procedure lets you poll a document from one or multiple stations. Be sure to set the polling  
password before polling. (See page 139)  
POLLING  
NO.=❚  
1:POLLING 2:POLLED  
1
2
3
POLLING  
PASSWORD=1234  
1
POLLING  
Enter a 4-digit polling password. (See Note 2)  
1 1 1 1  
PASSWORD=1111  
3
4
Ex:  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START  
Dial by any combination of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
5
• Abbreviated Dialing  
Manual Number Dialing, press  
after each  
after each  
SET  
SET  
station is entered  
(Up to 70 stations)  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
• Directory Search Dialing, press  
station is entered  
(For details, see pages 108 to 110.)  
Ex:  
* STORE *  
NO.001  
6
NOTE  
1. You can review the entered stations in Step 5 by pressing  
erase the displayed station or group as needed.  
or  
key, press  
to  
CLEAR  
2. If you have set the polling password in Fax Parameter No. 26, the password will appear on the  
display. You can still change the password temporarily by overwriting it with a new one.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Program Keys  
General Description  
Your fax machine has special Program Keys. These keys are useful if you frequently need to send or poll  
the same group of stations. You can use these keys to store a One-Touch group key, a sequence of stations  
to be polled, a deferred transmission or polling sequence or an additional One-Touch key.  
Setting for Group Dialing  
To set a Program Key for Group Dialing  
PROGRAM  
(1-5)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
3
PROGRAM[P ]  
PRESS PROGRAM KEY  
1
PROGRAM[P1]  
ENTER NAME  
NAME  
Ex:  
3
4
5
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START  
Enter the station name (up to 15 characters) by using the  
Character keys. (See page 14)  
Ex: PROG. A and  
SET  
Enter the station numbers by using One-Touch Key or  
and 3-digit code.  
and  
ABBR  
Ex:  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
0
1
0
[010](Station name)  
5553456  
You may use the  
station(s) before going to next step. If you find an error,  
press to erase the displayed station.  
or  
keys to review the entered  
CLEAR  
PROGRAM[P ]  
PRESS PROGRAM KEY  
6
You can now set other Program Keys by repeating the  
procedures from Step 3, or return to standby by pressing  
.
STOP  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Program Keys  
Setting for Deferred Transmission  
To set a Program Key for deferred transmission  
PROGRAM  
(1-5)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
7
3
PROGRAM[P ]  
PRESS PROGRAM KEY  
2
2
PROGRAM[P1]  
ENTER NAME  
NAME  
Ex:  
3
4
5
PROGRAM[P1]  
PRESS FUNCTION KEY  
Enter the station name (up to 15 characters) by using the  
Character keys. (See page 14)  
Ex: PROG. A and  
SET  
DEFERRED XMT  
START TIME  
:
1
1
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START  
Enter the starting time using 4 digits.  
Ex: (11:30 p.m.) and  
6
7
2 3 3 0  
SET  
Enter the station by any combination of the following  
methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
• Directory Search Dialing, press  
after each  
SET  
station is entered  
(For details, see pages 108 to 110.)  
Ex:  
PROGRAM[P ]  
PRESS PROGRAM KEY  
8
You can now set other Program Keys by repeating the  
procedures from Step 3, or return to standby by pressing  
.
STOP  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Program Keys  
Setting for Deferred Polling  
To set a Program Key for deferred polling  
PROGRAM  
(1-5)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
7
3
PROGRAM[P ]  
PRESS PROGRAM KEY  
2
2
PROGRAM[P1]  
ENTER NAME  
NAME  
Ex:  
3
4
5
PROGRAM[P1]  
PRESS FUNCTION KEY  
Enter the station name (up to 15 characters) by using the  
Character keys. (See page 14)  
Ex: PROG.A and  
SET  
DEFERRED POLLING  
START TIME  
:
1
2
DEFERRED POLLING  
PASSWORD=❚❚❚❚  
Enter the starting time.  
Ex: (10:00 p.m.) and  
6
7
2 2 0 0  
SET  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START  
Enter a 4-digit polling password.  
1 1 1 1  
Ex:  
and  
SET  
The polling password appears if it has been previously  
set.  
Enter the station by any combination of the following  
methods:  
8
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Directory Search Dialing, press  
after each  
SET  
station is entered  
(For details, see pages 108 to 110.)  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
Ex:  
PROGRAM[P ]  
PRESS PROGRAM KEY  
9
You can now set other Program Keys by repeating the  
procedures from Step 3, or return to standby by pressing  
.
STOP  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Program Keys  
Setting for Normal Polling  
To set a Program Key for normal polling  
PROGRAM  
(1-5)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
7
3
PROGRAM[P ]  
PRESS PROGRAM KEY  
2
2
PROGRAM[P1]  
ENTER NAME  
NAME  
Ex:  
3
4
5
PROGRAM[P1]  
PRESS FUNCTION KEY  
Enter the station name (up to 15 characters) by using the  
Character keys. (See page 14)  
Ex: PROG.A and  
SET  
POLLING  
PASSWORD=❚❚❚❚  
3
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START  
Enter a 4-digit polling password.  
1 1 1 1  
The polling password appears if it has been previously  
set.  
6
7
Ex:  
and  
SET  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
Enter the station by any combination of the following  
methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Directory Search Dialing, press  
after each  
SET  
station is entered  
(For details, see pages 108 to 110.)  
Ex:  
PROGRAM[P ]  
PRESS PROGRAM KEY  
8
You can now set other Program Keys by repeating the  
procedures from Step 3, or return to standby by pressing  
.
STOP  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Program Keys  
Setting for One-Touch Key  
To set a Program Key for One-Touch Key  
PROGRAM  
(1-5)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
7
3
PROGRAM[P ]  
PRESS PROGRAM KEY  
2
3
PROGRAM[P1]  
ENTER NAME  
NAME  
Ex:  
3
[P1] PROG.A  
ENTER TEL. NO.  
Enter the station name (up to 15 characters) by using the  
Character keys. (See page 14)  
4
Ex: PROG.A and  
SET  
[P1] PROG.A  
Enter a telephone number (up to 36 digits including  
pauses and spaces).  
9-555 1234  
5a  
5b  
Ex:  
9
PAUSE 5 5 5 SPACE 1 2 3 4  
[P1]PROG.A  
Enter the email address using character keys (up to 60  
characters).  
EMAIL  
Ex:  
a b c  
p a n a s o n  
i
c
c o m  
PROGRAM[P ]  
PRESS PROGRAM KEY  
6
You can now set other Program Keys by repeating the  
procedures from Step 3, or return to standby by pressing  
.
STOP  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Program Keys  
Setting the POP Access Key  
This function allows others to share your machine to retrieve their emails from the POP server by  
preprogramming their POP User Names and POP Passwords into the Program Keys (P1 to P4). They will  
be able to retrieve their emails by simply pressing the associated Program Key. (See Note 1)  
PROGRAM  
(1-5)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
3
PROGRAM[P ]  
PRESS PROGRAM KEY  
5
POP USER NAME  
Ex:  
3
4
POP USER NAME  
Enter a POP User Name (up to 40 characters) using the  
Character keys and press  
kate  
.
SET  
POP PASSWORD  
Ex:  
and  
SET  
k a  
t
e
Enter a POP Password (up to 10 characters) using the  
POP PASSWORD  
5
6
Character keys and press  
.
SET  
pana123  
p a n a  
Ex:  
1
and  
SET  
1 2 3  
DELETE EMAIL  
1:NO 2:YES  
NO.=1  
to leave messages on server after retrieval  
or  
PROGRAM[P ]  
PRESS PROGRAM KEY  
to delete messages on server after retrieval  
2
You can now set other Program Keys by repeating the  
procedures from Step 3, or return to standby by pressing  
.
STOP  
1. If security is a concern and to prevent unauthorized personnel from retrieving your email from  
the POP server, when programming the Program Key, leave the POP Password field "Blank".  
By leaving it "Blank", the machine will prompt you to enter the POP Password when the  
Program Key is pressed to retrieve mail.  
NOTE  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Program Keys  
Using the POP Access Key  
To retrieve your Email from the POP Server by using the Program Key, follow the procedure below.  
POP RCV USER NAME  
kate  
Press the Program key programmed for POP Access Key.  
1
2
Ex:  
If the POP User Name is not entered in the Program Key,  
enter the POP User Name (up to 40 characters).  
If the POP Password is not entered in the Program Key,  
enter the POP Password (up to 10 characters) and press  
.
START  
NO NEW MAIL  
If the POP server has not received any new mail, the  
following message is displayed.  
3
4
1 NEW MAIL(S)  
If POP server received new mail, the machine will display  
the number of mails on the server, then receive and print  
the email.  
ON LINE * RCV *  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Program Keys  
Changing or Erasing the Program Key Settings  
To change the settings in a Program Key, follow the procedure on setting a Program Key on pages 142 to  
• Start time or station(s) for deferred transmission  
• Station(s) for normal polling  
• Start time or station(s) for deferred polling  
• Station(s) for group dialing  
Telephone number and station name for One-Touch key  
To erase the settings in a Program Key  
PROGRAM  
(1-5)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
3
PROGRAM[P ]  
PRESS PROGRAM KEY  
4
PROGRAM[P1]  
DELETE? 1:YES 2:NO  
Press the Program key you want to erase.  
Ex:  
3
4
5
* DELETING *  
PROGRAM[P1]  
1
PROGRAM[P ]  
PRESS PROGRAM KEY  
You can now erase other Program Keys by repeating the  
procedures from Step 3, or return to standby by pressing  
.
STOP  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sender Selection  
General Description  
This operation allows the user to select one of the 25 preset User Names and Email Addresses before a  
transmission. The selected User Names is printed on the Header of each page sent and on the COMM.  
Journal. When sending email, the selected user name and/or email address appears in the "From:" field of  
the email message.  
Setting the Sender Selection  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
4
145 SENDER SELECTION  
1:INVALID  
3
1
2
4
5
145 SENDER SELECTION  
2:VALID  
4
5
SENDER SELECTION  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
ENTER USER NAME  
Enter the Sender Selection number.  
Ex: (01 to 24)  
12  
6
7
1 2  
ENTER USER NAME  
12 PANASONIC SALES  
Enter your User Name (max. 25 characters and digits) by  
using character keys. (See page 14)  
Ex:  
P A N A S O N I  
C
SPACE  
and  
(See Note 1)  
SET  
S A L E S  
ENTER EMAIL ADDRESS  
12  
Enter an email address to be printed on the "From" field of  
the email message (max. 60 characters).  
8
ENTER EMAIL ADDRESS  
Ex:  
a b c  
p a n a s o n  
i
c
c o m  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Sender Selection  
Setting the Sender Selection  
9
ENTER USER NAME  
13  
To record another User Name, repeat Steps 6 to 9.  
To return to standby, press  
.
STOP  
1. Use  
to copy the default User Name that was programmed in the User Parameters.  
COPY  
NOTE  
You can add the department name following the default User Name.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sender Selection  
Sending Document with Sender Selection  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
Enter email address or telephone number.  
2
3
SELECT SENDER(00-24)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
12 PANASONIC SALES  
Enter a number or use  
that you want to use. (See Note 2)  
or  
to select the User Name  
4
5
Ex:  
1 2  
The document is sent as an email message with the  
selected user name and/or email address appearing in  
the "From" field of the email message.  
1. The Sender Selection function cannot be used in the Voice Dialing Mode for ordinary  
transmission.  
NOTE  
2. If you do no select a User Name in Step 4, the unit selects the default User Name (00) that was  
programmed in the User Parameters for ordinary transmission.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sender Selection  
Printing the Sender Selection List  
The Sender Selection List can be printed out following the Fax Parameter List.  
To enable the printing of the Sender Selection List, change the setting of Fax Parameter No. 145 (SENDER  
SELECTION) to "Valid". (See page 150)  
PRINT OUT  
(1-7)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
6
* PRINTING *  
FAX PARAMETER LIST  
4
Sample Sender Selection List (Prints following the Fax Parameter List  
*************** -FAX PARAMETER LIST- ***************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 15:00 ***P.02  
SENDER SELECTION LIST  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
NO.  
USER NAME  
EMAIL ADDRESS  
01  
02  
03  
Panafax Sales  
Panafax Service  
Panafax Accounting  
24  
Panafax Engineering  
-
PANASONIC  
- ****** -  
-
********************************************* -HEAD OFFICE  
201 555 1212- ******  
Explanation of Contents  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
Sender Selection Number  
User Name  
: 01-24  
: Up to 25 characters  
: Up to 60 characters  
Email Address  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Subject Line Entry  
General Description  
Your machine will automatically add the Default Subject information that was entered during the User  
Parameter setup, to the Subject Line of all outgoing emails.  
If you would like for the machine to prompt you for the Subject before each email transmission, change the  
Fax Parameter No. 159 (SUBJECT LINE ENTRY) to "2:Valid".  
Sending Email with Subject Line Entry  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
Enter the email addresses by any combination of the  
following methods:  
2
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Directory Search Dialing, press  
email address is entered.  
after each  
after each  
SET  
SET  
• Manual Number Dialing, press  
station is entered (up to 70 addresses).  
<01>(Station name)  
Ex:  
ENTER SUBJECT OR  
PRESS START TO SEND  
3
4
Enter the Subject (max. 40 characters and digits) by using  
the Character keys. (See page 14) To use the Default  
Subject pre-programmed in the User Parameter, just  
press  
.
START  
Ex:  
F A X P4 SPACE 22 SHIFT  
f
r o m P4 SPACE 22 SHIFT  
r P2  
P4 SPACE  
22 SHIFT o n e s  
SUBJECT  
FAX from Mr. Jones  
M
.
22 SHIFT  
J
22 SHIFT  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Subject Line Entry  
Sending Email with Subject Line Entry  
* STORE *  
NO.001  
PAGES=001 01%  
5
* STORE * COMPLETED  
PAGES=001 10%  
The document(s) is stored into memory with a file number.  
Then connects to the LAN and starts sending the email  
message.  
ON LINE * MEM.MXT *  
ID:(Station name)  
1. If no default subject is programmed, the message is shown as "IMAGE from Internet FAX" for  
the subject.  
NOTE  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inbound Routing  
Setting the Routing Parameters  
Your machine can route documents received from a G3 fax machine to email address(s) or to Internet Fax  
machine(s) connected to a LAN as an email, as well as to other G3 fax machine(s) over the telephone line.  
To use this feature, the Fax Parameter No. 152 "SUB-ADDRESS ROUTING" and/or No. 153 "TSI  
ROUTING" must be set to "2:Valid".  
No. 152 SUB-ADDRESS ROUTING: Set this parameter to perform an ITU-T sub-address query within its  
auto dialer and to route the received document(s) to the corresponding stations email address(s) or  
telephone number(s).  
No. 153 TSI ROUTING: Set this parameter to perform a Numeric ID (TSI frame information) query within its  
auto dialer and to route the received document(s) to the corresponding stations email address(s) or  
telephone number(s).  
No. 154 ROUTING HEADER FORMAT: Use this parameter to select the type of email header to be included  
in the "From" field of each routed faxes. (Default setting is "1:Originator")  
Originator : The originating fax machine’s TSI will appear in the "From" field of the routed email.  
Relay Station : The routing station’s email address will appear in the "From" field of the routed email.  
No. 155 PRINT ROUTED DOCUMENT: Set this parameter to select whether a received fax to be routed is  
always printed on your machine or only when the routing operation fails.  
To set the above Inbound Routing parameters, follow the steps below.  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
4
1
152 SUB-ADDR ROUTING  
1:INVALID  
3
4
5
2
152 SUB-ADDR ROUTING  
1:INVALID  
for “INVALID”  
for “VALID”  
1
or  
152 SUB-ADDR ROUTING  
2:VALID  
2
153 TSI ROUTING  
1:INVALID  
5
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Inbound Routing  
Setting the Routing Parameters  
153 TSI ROUTING  
1:INVALID  
for “INVALID”  
1
6
or  
153 TSI ROUTING  
2:VALID  
for “VALID”  
2
154 ROUTE HEADER FMT  
1:ORIGINATOR  
7
8
154 ROUTE HEADER FMT  
1:ORIGINATOR  
for “ORIGINATOR”  
1
or  
154 ROUTE HEADER FMT  
2:RELAY STATION  
for “RELAY STATION”  
2
155 PRINT ROUTED DOC  
1:INC. ONLY  
9
155 PRINT ROUTED DOC  
1:INC. ONLY  
for “INC. ONLY”  
for “ALWAYS”  
1
10  
or  
155 PRINT ROUTED DOC  
2:ALWAYS  
2
156 PRT FORWARD DOC  
1:INC. ONLY  
11  
12  
156 PRT FORWARD DOC  
1:INC. ONLY  
for “INC. ONLY”  
for “ALWAYS”  
1
or  
156 PRT FORWARD DOC  
2:ALWAYS  
2
13  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inbound Routing  
Entering One-Touch/Abbreviated Dialing Numbers for Inbound Routing  
If the Inbound Routing parameters are set, an ITU-T sub-address and/or originator’s Numeric ID (TSI frame  
information) can be programmed with each email address in One-Touch, Abbreviated numbers or Program  
1:ONE-TOUCH  
2:ABBR NO.  
1
7
2
ONE-TOUCH<  
PRESS ONE-TOUCH  
>
Select  
Select  
for One-Touch dialing number / email address.  
for ABBR dialing number / email address.  
1
2
2
3
Ex:  
Ex:  
1
<01>  
ENTER EMAIL ADDRESS  
or  
To change the input mode (between "ENTER EMAIL  
ADDRESS" and "ENTER TEL. NO."),  
<01>  
ENTER TEL. NO.  
EMAIL  
press  
.
<01>  
Enter an email address (up to 60 characters) or a  
telephone number (up to 36 digits).  
4
5
or  
<01>  
55512342762  
<01>ENTER NAME  
or  
<01>ENTER NAME  
55512342762  
Enter the station name using character keys  
(up to 15 characters).  
<01> SALES DEPT  
6
Ex:  
D E P T  
S A L E S SPACE  
or  
<01> SALES DEPT  
55512342762  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Inbound Routing  
Entering One-Touch/Abbreviated Dialing Numbers for Inbound Routing  
ROUTING: SUB-ADDRESS  
7
ROUTING: SUB-ADDRESS  
1234567  
Enter the sub-address (up to 20 characters) and press  
8
9
.
SET  
ROUTING: TSI  
Enter a Numeric ID (TSI) (up to 20 characters) and press  
ROUTING: TSI  
1234567  
.
SET  
To return to standby, press  
.
STOP  
ONE-TOUCH<  
>
PRESS ONE-TOUCH  
1. "+" and "SPACE" entries in the "ROUTING: TSI" field are ignored by the receiving machine.  
NOTE  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Edit File Mode  
General Description  
Your machine has a document image memory which enables you to reserve memory transmission, memory  
deferred transmission, memory polling and so on.  
After reserving the communications in memory, you may need to change the settings of the  
communication(s) while it is still in memory. This section describes how to use the file editing features.  
Printing a File List  
The contents of the communication settings may have to be modified or deleted. To verify the contents,  
follow the steps below to print out a file list.  
EDIT FILE MODE (1-6)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
9
1:FILE LIST?  
PRESS SET TO SELECT  
1
2
FILE LIST  
1:PRINT 2:VIEW  
3
* PRINTING *  
FILE LIST  
1
4
Sample File List  
*************** -FILE LIST- *********************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 15:00 *********  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
FILE COMM. TYPE  
No.  
CREATED TIME START TIME PAGES DESTINATION(S)  
001  
002  
DEFERRED XMT  
MMM-dd 13:20  
20:30  
22:30  
[001]  
MEM. DEF. XMT MMM-dd 13:20  
003  
[011] [012] [013] [016] [017]  
-PANASONIC  
- ***** -  
-
************************************ -HEAD OFFICE  
201 555 1212- *********  
Explanation of Contents  
(1) File number  
:
If the file is now being executed, a "*" is indicated on the left of the file number.  
Date/time that these files were stored.  
(2) Communication type  
(3) Stored date/time  
(4) Executing time  
:
:
If the file is a Timer Controlled Communication, the start time is printed in this  
column.  
If the file is an incomplete file, "INCOMP" is printed in this column.  
(5) Number of stored page(s)  
(6) Destination  
:
ABBR. No./One-Touch No./Manual Dialing No.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Edit File Mode  
Viewing the Contents of a File List  
To view the contents of a file list on the display without printing it, follow the steps below.  
EDIT FILE MODE (1-6)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
3
9
1:FILE LIST?  
PRESS SET TO SELECT  
1
2
FILE LIST  
1:PRINT 2:VIEW  
USE THE ∨ ∧ KEYS TO  
SCROLL EACH FILE  
4
5
or  
repeatedly until the  
display shows a file you want to edit.  
Sample display  
Type of File  
Status  
XMT:  
Transmission  
Relay Transmission  
Polling  
Polled  
Journal / Report  
RLY:  
IN PRG: In progress  
REDIAL: Waiting to redial  
INCOMP: Incomplete file  
POLL:  
POLLED:  
JOURNAL:  
RCV TO MEM: Receive to Memory  
001 XMT 10:00 P010  
<01>(Station name)  
File Number  
Entered station  
Number of pages  
6
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Edit File Mode  
Changing the Start Time or the Station of a File  
To change the start time and/or stations in a communication file, follow the steps below.  
EDIT FILE MODE (1-6)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
9
ENTER FILE NO.OR ∨ ∧  
FILE NO.=❚❚❚  
2
ENTER FILE NO.OR ∨ ∧  
Enter the file number or use  
that you want to change.  
or  
to select the file  
FILE NO.=001  
3
4
Ex:  
0 0 1  
DEFERRED XMT  
START TIME  
22:30  
(See Note 2)  
Enter a new start time.  
Ex: (6:00 a.m.)  
DEFERRED XMT  
START TIME  
06:00  
5
6
0 6 0 0  
(If you do not have to change the time, skip to Step 6.)  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START  
To delete the station(s), press  
or  
key until the  
7
station you want to delete appears. Then press  
or  
Enter the station(s) you want to add.  
.
CLEAR  
1 STN(S) ARE SET  
ADD MORE OR START  
* STORE *  
NO.005  
8
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Edit File Mode  
Changing the Start Time or the Station of a File  
1. Your machine cannot change the start time and/or stations in the file while it is being sent or  
waiting to redial.  
NOTE  
2. If the file is not a Deferred Communication File, the following message is shown on the display.  
SET DEFERRED COMM.?  
1:YES 2:NO  
1
Press  
to change the type of the file for deferred communication file.  
3. If you edit the file that is saved as an incomplete file, after pressing  
machine will prompt you whether to execute the file immediately.  
The display shows:  
in Step 8, your  
START  
RETRY INCOMP FILE?  
1:YES 2:NO  
1
Press  
to execute the file immediately.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit File Mode  
Deleting a File  
To delete the file in memory, follow the steps below.  
EDIT FILE MODE (1-6)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
9
ENTER FILE NO.OR ∨ ∧  
FILE NO.=❚❚❚  
2
3
ENTER FILE NO.OR ∨ ∧  
Enter the file number or use  
that you want to delete.  
or  
to select the file  
FILE NO.=001  
3
4
Ex:  
(See Note 2)  
0 0 1  
DELETE FILE NO.001?  
1:YES 2:NO  
* DELETING *  
FILE NO.=001  
1
5
ENTER FILE NO.OR ∨ ∧  
FILE NO.=❚❚❚  
Enter the next file number you want to delete or press  
to return to standby.  
STOP  
1. Your machine cannot delete the file while it is being sent.  
2. Enter as the file number and press  
there is the file in progress).  
NOTE  
to delete all files (except when  
SET  
The following message is shown on the display.  
DELETE ALL FILES?  
1:YES 2:NO  
1
Press  
to delete all files.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Edit File Mode  
Printing Out a File  
To print the contents of the communication file, follow the steps bellow.  
EDIT FILE MODE (1-6)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
9
ENTER FILE NO.OR ∨ ∧  
FILE NO.=❚❚❚  
2
4
ENTER FILE NO.OR ∨ ∧  
Enter the file number or use  
that you want to print.  
or  
to select the file  
FILE NO.=001  
3
4
Ex:  
0 0 1  
* PRINTING *  
PAGE=001/003  
Your machine will print the file. The document(s) will  
remain in memory even after printing the file.  
1. Your machine cannot print the file while it is being sent.  
NOTE  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Edit File Mode  
Adding Documents into a File  
To add documents into the file, follow the steps bellow.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 05%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
EDIT FILE MODE (1-6)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
2
9
ENTER FILE NO.OR ∨ ∧  
FILE NO.=❚❚❚  
3
5
ENTER FILE NO.OR ∨ ∧  
FILE NO.=001  
Enter the file number or use  
that you want to add.  
or  
to select the file  
Ex:  
0 0 1  
* STORE *  
NO.001  
PAGES=002 10%  
4
Your machine will start storing the document(s) into a file.  
1. Your machine cannot add the document into a file while it is being sent or waiting to redial.  
NOTE  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Edit File Mode  
Retry an Incomplete File  
If a memory communication has been unsuccessful due to a busy line or no answer, the document you  
stored is automatically erased from memory after the last redial.  
If you need to retain the document even if the communication failed, change the setting of Fax Parameter  
No. 31 (INC. FILE SAVE) to Valid in advance. (See page 80)  
To retry the incomplete file, print a File List first to verify the file number. (See page 160)  
Then, follow the steps below.  
EDIT FILE MODE (1-6)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
9
ENTER FILE NO.OR ∨ ∧  
FILE NO.=❚❚❚  
2
6
ENTER FILE NO.OR ∨ ∧  
Enter the file number or use  
that you want to retry.  
or  
to select the file  
FILE NO.=001  
3
4
Ex:  
0 0 1  
* STORE *  
<01>(Station name)  
NO.001  
* DIALING * NO.001  
(Station name)  
Your machine will retry the file and start dialing  
immediately.  
1. To confirm or change the entered telephone number for the file, see pages 160 and 162.  
2. If you set Fax Parameter No. 31 to Valid, all incomplete files will remain in the memory. To  
avoid memory overflow, please check the memory content frequently. We recommend that  
optional flash memory card is installed when this function is used. (See page 242)  
NOTE  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Access Code  
General Description  
The Access Code prevents an unauthorized user from operating the machine. Once a 4-digit Access Code  
is registered, no one can operate the machine without entering the correct access code.  
Automatic Receiving, however, is always available. After you complete any operation, such as mode setting  
or transmission, and the display returns to standby, you have to re-enter the access code in order to use the  
machine again. Registering the Access Code does not affect the use of the machine in any other way.  
Setting the Access Code  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
4
3
38 ACCESS CODE  
38 ACCESS CODE  
❚❚❚❚  
3
8
Enter a 4-digit Access Code.  
Ex:  
1234  
1234  
4
5
1 2 3 4  
38 ACCESS CODE  
1:ALL  
38 ACCESS CODE  
2:PARAMETERS 1234  
Select Restriction Level.  
6
7
1
for All operations  
or  
for Setting and Printing the Fax Parameters only.  
2
Ex:  
2
1. To erase the Access Code, enter the Access Code and press  
and follow the  
NOTE  
SET  
procedure above to Step 3, then press  
,
and  
.
STOP  
CLEAR  
SET  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Access Code  
Operating Your Machine with the Access Code  
(Restrict all Operations)  
MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00  
ACCESS CODE=  
Enter the Access Code.  
1
Ex:  
1 2 3 4  
MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00  
ACCESS CODE=****  
MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00  
2
00%  
Now you can operate the machine normally.  
Operating Your Machine with the Access Code  
(Restrict Access of Fax Parameters Only  
)
The machine can restrict the operation of setting/printing the Fax Parameters only.  
EX: When setting the Fax Parameter.  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
ENTER ACCESS CODE  
4
ENTER ACCESS CODE  
Enter a 4-digit Access Code.  
Ex:  
****  
3
4
1 2 3 4  
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
Now you can operate the machine normally.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receive To Memory  
General Description  
This feature is used to secure all received documents by storing them into the memory. To print out the  
document from memory, the authorized operator must enter the correct password.  
Setting the RCV To Memory Password  
SET MODE  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
(1-8)  
1
2
7
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
4
3
37 RCV TO MEMORY  
3
❚❚❚❚  
7
37 RCV TO MEMORY  
Enter a 4-digit RCV to Memory Password.  
Ex:  
1234  
4
5
1 2 3 4  
Setting RCV To Memory  
SELECT MODE  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
(1-9)  
1
8
RCV TO MEMORY=OFF  
1:OFF 2:ON 3:PRINT  
2
5
RCV TO MEMORY=ON  
1:OFF 2:ON 3:PRINT  
2
3
MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00  
< RCV TO MEMORY >  
4
1. When the memory overflows, the machine will stop receiving and release the line. The  
machine will not answer the next incoming call until there is space available in the memory.  
2. We recommend that optional flash memory card is installed when this function is used. See  
page 239 on Image Memory Capacity.  
NOTE  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Receive To Memory  
Printing Out Documents  
After receiving a document with the Receive To Memory feature, the following message will appear on the  
display.  
MESSAGE IN MEMORY  
< RCV TO MEMORY >  
To print the document, follow the steps below.  
SELECT MODE  
(1-9)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
8
RCV TO MEMORY=ON  
1:OFF 2:ON 3:PRINT  
5
3
RCV TO MEMORY=PRINT  
1:OFF 2:ON 3:PRINT  
3
4
INPUTPASSWORD  
❚❚❚❚  
INPUTPASSWORD  
1234  
Enter the password to print the documents.  
(See Note 1)  
5
6
Ex:  
1 2 3 4  
* PRINTING *  
MEMORY RCVD DOC  
Machine will start to print the documents.  
1. If the password has not been set, your machine will not prompt you to enter the password.  
2. The documents will be printed immediately after pressing in Step 4.  
NOTE  
SET  
3. Once the RCV TO MEMORY feature is set to "On", the password cannot be changed (Fax  
Parameter No. 37 will not be shown on the LCD display). If you wish to change the password,  
set RCV TO MEMORY feature to “Off” first. Then change the password. (See page 170)  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Distinctive Ring Detector (DRD)  
General Description  
Your machine has a special feature in conjunction with an optional service provided by many local  
telephone companies. It can distinguish up to 4 telephone numbers with a corresponding ring pattern  
identifying each number. "DRD" lets you provide multiple phone numbers, one for your fax, business or  
personal use with only one single phone line.  
Please check with your local telephone company on the availability of this service in your area.  
Your machine can be programmed to respond to only 1 of the 4 distinctive ring patterns. To select the  
corresponding ring pattern for your fax number, refer to the Fax Parameter Table on page 81.  
The following table shows a typical example with 4 telephone numbers on a single phone line  
Telephone No.  
555-1111  
Usage  
Business  
Distinctive Ring Sound  
Ring Pattern  
Type A, Standard Ring  
Type B, Double Ring  
Riiing...............................Riiing................................  
Ring...Ring.......................Ring...Ring........................  
Ring...Ring...Riiing............Ring...Ring...Riiing.............  
555-2222  
Fax  
555-3333  
Personal  
Type C,Triple Ring  
(Short-Short-Long)  
555-4444  
Teenager  
Ring...Riiing...Ring............Ring...Riiing...Ring.............  
Type D,Triple Ring  
(All other than type C)  
The following illustration shows a typical set up, with your machine set to detect Type B (double ring) ring  
pattern.  
AtYour Location with  
Distinctive Ring Service  
Ring..Ring.............Ring..Ring  
A person recognizes the call  
is for the fax machine by the  
double ring pattern sound.  
Ring..Ring.............Ring..Ring  
The fax machine distinguishes  
the call is for the fax by the  
double ring pattern and answers  
automatically.  
Fax No. "555-2222"  
Dialing "555-2222"  
Ring..Ring.............Ring..Ring  
A person recognizes the call  
is for the fax machine by the  
double ring pattern sound.  
1. "Riiing" means a long ringing sound and "Ring" means a short ringing sound.  
NOTE  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fax Cover Sheet  
General Description  
A Fax Cover Sheet can be automatically attached to your transmit document(s) that shows the recipient's  
name, originator's name and the number of pages attached.  
Transmitted as:  
Received as:  
Header P.01 Header P.02  
Fax  
Cover  
Sheet  
Page 1  
Page 2  
Page 1  
Page 2  
Total P.02  
Using the Fax Cover Sheet  
To attach a Fax Cover Sheet to a transmission, follow the procedure below.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
SELECT MODE  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
(1-9)  
2
8
COVER SHEET=OFF  
1:OFF 2:ON  
3
3
COVER SHEET=OFF  
1:OFF 2:ON  
1
4
for “OFF” (Cover Sheet is not attached)  
or  
or  
COVER SHEET=ON  
1:OFF 2:ON  
2
for “ON” (Cover Sheet is attached)  
5
Dial the station(s) you wish to send the documents to.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
6
Ex:  
1. To change the preset Fax Cover Sheet Setting, change the setting of Fax Parameter No. 56,  
see page 82.  
NOTE  
2. This function is available for memory or direct transmission modes.  
3. The Fax Cover Sheet is not counted in the number of pages column of the journals.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Fax Cover Sheet  
Using the Fax Cover Sheet  
Fax Cover Sheet Sample  
***** FACSIMILE COVER SHEET *****  
(1)  
MMM-dd-yyyy 15:00  
(2)  
Message To:  
SALES DEPT.  
(3)  
Message From:  
PANASONIC  
201 555 1212  
(4)  
02  
Page(s)  
Following This Cover Page  
Explanation of Contents  
(1) Starting time of communication.  
(2) Recorded name in the One-Touch, ABBR. No. or dialed telephone number.  
(3) Your LOGO (up to 25 characters) and ID Number. (Up to 20 digits)  
(4) The number of pages to follow. This information is not shown when transmitting by Direct Transmission Mode.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PIN Code Access  
General Description  
If your PBX requires a PIN (Personal Identification Number) code to get an outside line, your machine can  
be set to prompt the user to enter a PIN code before any dialing.  
Selecting the Access Method (Prefix or Suffix)  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
4
39 PIN CODE ACCESS  
1:NONE  
3
4
3
2
9
39 PIN CODE ACCESS  
2:SUFFIX  
for suffix code.  
for prefix code.  
or  
or  
39 PIN CODE ACCESS  
3:PREFIX  
3
5
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
PIN Code Access  
Dialing with a PIN Code  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
Dial by any combination of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
2
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Manual Number Dialing, press  
after each  
after each  
SET  
station is entered  
(Up to 70 stations)  
• Directory Search Dialing, press  
SET  
station is entered  
(For details, see pages 108 to 110.)  
Ex:  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
[010](Station name)  
5553456  
0
1
0
2 STN(S) ARE SET  
ADD MORE OR START  
If you want to confirm the number of stations you have  
entered, press  
.
SET  
ENTER PIN CODE  
3
ENTER PIN CODE  
Ex:  
(up to 36 digits)  
9 8 7 6  
9876  
4
5
* STORE *  
NO.002  
PAGES=001 05%  
* DIALING * NO.002  
(Station name)  
Your machine stores the document and starts dialing the  
PIN code and telephone number as you specified.  
1. The PIN code is shown as "  
" on the display when dialing the number.  
NOTE  
2. This feature is not available when dialing a number by using Off-Hook or On-Hook Direct  
Dialing mode.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fax Forward  
Setting Fax Forward  
This feature allows all incoming faxes to be forwarded to the station registered in the one-touch or  
abbreviated dialing number. Once the faxes are received in the memory, the machine will forward the  
received document(s) to the telephone number registered in the one-touch or abbreviated dialing number.  
This function is convenient when you would like to receive faxes in another place (i. e. your home) at night  
or during a holiday.  
SET MODE  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
(1-8)  
1
2
7
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
4
54 FAX FORWARD  
1:INVALID  
3
5
2
4
54 FAX FORWARD  
2:VALID  
4
5
54 FAX FORWARD  
ENTER STATION  
Enter the station to forward the received faxes to, by  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
assigning a one-touch key or an abbreviated dialing  
number.  
Ex:  
6
or  
[100](Station name)  
1
0
0
7
1. When the Fax Forward feature is set, the one-touch or the abbreviated dialing number is  
restricted from editing. Please change this function to “Invalid” when you would like to edit the  
telephone number.  
NOTE  
2. If the communication to transfer a received document(s) fails, the received document will print  
out and then is erased from memory even if the Fax Parameter No. 31 (INC. FILE SAVE) is set  
to “Valid”.  
If you wish to save the document into memory in case of communication failure, set your  
machine to Receive To Memory. (See page 170)  
3. It is not possible to receive a document if the memory of your machine overflows or is about  
95% used.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Ifax Return Receipt  
General Description  
Your machine automatically sends an Ifax Return Receipt to the sender confirming email reception from  
another Panasonic Internet Fax.  
To disable this feature, follow the steps below.  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
4
150 IFAX RET RECEIPT  
2:VALID  
3
1
1
5
0
150 IFAX RET RECEIPT  
1:INVALID  
4
5
for “INVALID”  
1. Your machine sends the Ifax Return Receipt only when receiving from another Panasonic  
brand Internet Fax. It will not confirm email sent from a PC. (The default setting for this  
parameter is "2:VALID".)  
NOTE  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Network Features  
Network Scanner  
General Description  
You can import Fax images by using your machine transmission function.  
Storing a specific email address into a One-Touch Key/Program Key allows you to import picture images by  
pressing a single key.  
LAN  
Internet Fax  
DX-800  
PC  
PC  
Images  
Images  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
2
3
Set document(s) face down.  
To improve the scanning quality, you can temporarily  
change the Resolution to "S-FINE" and if you are  
scanning color photographs or illustrations with gray  
tones, change the Halftone setting to "PHOTO".  
Dial by any combination of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Directory Search Dialing  
• Manual Number Dialing  
4
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Network Printer  
General Description  
Your machine allows you to print documents created on your PC using various software applications.  
To be able to use this function, install the Printer Driver and LPR software downloaded from the web site first  
or install the software from the CD-ROM included with the machine. (See page 26)  
LAN  
InternetFax  
PC  
Select your machine as your default printer on the PC.  
1
From any software application, instruct your PC to print to  
your machine.  
2
Your machine receives and prints the document.  
3
1. The IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway IP Address (TCP/IP Gateway Address)  
NOTE  
must be programmed on your machine to use as a Network Printer.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Relayed Transmission  
General Description  
The Internet Relayed Transmission feature can save you time and transmission costs if you need to send  
the same documents to multiple G3 fax machines.  
This is especially true if the transmissions are long distance.  
You can send documents to any G3 fax machine by using the Internet via a LAN from your machine to  
another Relay Station.  
You can also send an email with attached TIFF-F file(s) to any G3 fax machine from your PC using your  
current email application through a Relay Station.  
To use the Internet Relayed Transmission, the Relay Station must be set up properly.  
Example 1: Internet Relay Transmission  
EndReceiving  
Station  
Relay  
Station  
Internet  
E-Mail  
InitialSending Station  
Internet Fax or PC  
G3 Fax  
InternetFax  
London  
Stockholm  
New York  
COMM.  
Journal  
G3 Fax  
Berlin  
Local TelephoneCall  
G3 Fax  
Rome  
From your PC or your machine you can send documents to a Relay Station with the telephone number of  
the End Receiving Station(s).  
After the Relay Station completes its transmission to the End Receiving Station, your PC or your machine  
receives a COMM. Journal from the Relay Station. This COMM. Journal confirms whether the Internet  
Relayed Transmission was successful.  
Example 2: Fax Server (Intranet Relay Transmission)  
Mail Server  
PC  
PC  
G3  
(1)  
(3)  
P
S
T
N
(2)  
G3  
(3)  
PC  
PC  
G3  
DX-800  
(1) Initiate a Relay Transmission via email to the Mail Server  
(2) Mail Server transfers the email to your machine with relay instructions to transmit to a G3 machine  
(3) Your machine initiates a telephone call to a G3 machine and transmits the document  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Relayed Transmission  
Relay Network  
This Feature saves you time and long distance phone line costs when sending an Internet Fax directly from  
your machine to the end receiving station(s).  
A Relay Network is basically composed of an Originating Station, which can be an Internet Fax Machine  
(your machine) or a PC, a Relaying Internet Fax Machine (another machine), and End-receiving station(s),  
which can be regular G3 Fax machines.  
By simply sending a Document(s) from your machine or an email message from a PC, to the Relay  
Machine, which is then transmitted by your machine to the end receiving station(s) using regular phone lines  
as a normal G3 Fax message. (PC can have TIFF-F or text (.txt) file attachment)  
The end receiving station(s) are usually local in relation to the Relay Station, which incurs a local telephone  
charge for the Fax Transmission.  
After the Relay Station completes its transmission to the end receiving station(s), a Communication Journal  
is sent back to the originator from the Relaying Internet Fax confirming whether the Internet Relayed  
Transmission was successful. Any Relay activity information is sent by email from the Relaying Internet Fax  
to its Manager’s Email Address, which is programmed in the Relaying Internet Fax machine’s User  
To use the Internet Relayed Transmission, just follow the set up procedure described on pages 184 to 193  
and obtain certain information provided by the Relaying machine operator. A sample network is shown in  
Figure 1.  
Figure 1 shows a sample network as seen from New York (Initiating Station), London and Singapore are  
(Relay Stations) connected to New York, and the (End Receiving Stations) are Stockholm, Rome,  
Tokyo, Hong Kong, and Sydney.  
With this simple network using two Relay Stations, you can send a document with one operation to any  
combination of stations in the network via the London Relay Station and/or Singapore Relay Station.  
London  
New York  
Email Address: [email protected]  
Email Address: [email protected]  
Host Name:  
london  
Host Name:  
newyork  
Relay XMT Password: uk-rly  
Relay XMT Password: usa-rly  
Stockholm  
Tel. No.: 46 8 111 1234  
London  
Berlin  
Tel. No.: 46 611 111 1234  
New York  
Tokyo  
Tel. No.: 81 33 111 1234  
Rome  
Tel. No.: 39 6 111 1234  
Hong Kong  
Tel. No.: 852 23123456  
Singapore  
Sydney  
Tel. No.: 61 2 111 1234  
Wellington  
Tel. No.: 64 4 111 1234  
Singapore  
Email Address: [email protected]  
Host Name: singapore  
Relay XMT Password: sg-rly  
Figure 1 : Sample Network  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Relayed Transmission  
Relay Network  
Table 2, 3 and 4 are sample settings for the Sample Network shown in Figure 1.  
Table 2 : Sample Parameter and Phone Book Dialing Number Table for New York (Originating Station)  
Telephone Number  
Email Address(SMTP)  
Host Name  
:
:
:
:
212 111 1234  
newyork  
Relay XMT Password  
usa-rly  
Relay Station Address  
Station Name  
London  
Stockholm  
Singapore  
Tokyo  
London Relay  
Singapore Relay  
Rome  
Hong Kong  
Sydney  
Email Address / Telephone Number  
46 8 111 1234  
81 33 111 1234  
39 6 111 1234  
---  
[London Relay]  
---  
[Singapore Relay]  
---  
---  
[London Relay]  
[Singapore Relay]  
[Singapore Relay]  
852 23123456  
61 2 111 1234  
Table 3 : Sample Parameter and Phone Book Dialing Number Table for London (Relaying Station)  
Telephone Number  
Email Address(SMTP)  
Host Name  
:
:
:
:
71 111 1234  
london  
uk-rly  
Relay XMT Password  
Station Name  
New York  
Stockholm  
Singapore  
Tokyo  
Singapore Relay  
Rome  
Hong Kong  
Sydney  
Email Address / Telephone Number  
46 8 111 1234  
81 33 111 1234  
39 6 111 1234  
852 23123456  
61 2 111 1234  
Relay Station Address  
---  
[London Relay]  
---  
[Singapore Relay]  
---  
[London Relay]  
[Singapore Relay]  
[Singapore Relay]  
---  
London Relay  
Table 4 : Sample Parameter and Phone Book Dialing Number Table for Singapore (Relaying Station)  
Telephone Number  
Email Address(SMTP)  
Host Name  
:
:
:
:
65 111 1234  
singapore  
sg-rly  
Relay XMT Password  
Station Name  
London  
Stockholm  
New York  
Tokyo  
London Relay  
Rome  
Hong Kong  
Sydney  
Singapore Relay  
Email Address / Telephone Number  
46 8 111 1234  
81 33 111 1234  
39 6 111 1234  
852 23123456  
61 2 111 1234  
Relay Station Address  
---  
[London Relay]  
---  
[Singapore Relay]  
---  
[London Relay]  
[Singapore Relay]  
[Singapore Relay]  
---  
1. The Relay XMT Password must be registered for your machine to work as a Relay Station.  
NOTE  
2. To prevent unauthorized stations from accessing your Relay Station for Internet Relayed  
Transmissions, you must setup your network security. Enter acceptable Domain Name(s) and  
the Manager’s Email Address for notification of all Internet Relayed Transmissions. (See page  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Relayed Transmission  
Setting Up Your Machine as an Internet Relay Station  
To set up your machine as a Relay Station, the following parameters must be set properly.  
1. Relay XMT (Fax Parameter No. 142)  
Selecting whether the machine will accept and performs G3 relayed transmission. (See page 82)  
1) Invalid  
2) Valid  
- Machine will not accept a Relay XMT request.  
- Machine will accept a Relay XMT request.  
2. Relay XMT Report (Fax Parameter No. 143)  
Selecting how the COMM. Journal for relayed transmission is sent to the originator.  
1) Off  
- Do not send  
2) Always  
- The COMM. Journal is always sent after a Relay Communication is completed  
or has failed.  
3) Inc. Only  
- The COMM. Journal is sent if the Relay Communication to the destination has failed.  
3. Relay XMT Password (User’s Parameter) (See Note 1)  
Enter a Relay XMT Password (up to 10 characters) to be used for protection against unauthorized  
(outside) stations from accessing your machine to relay messages to a G3 fax machine via PSTN. This  
password should be given out to authorized people only.  
4. Relay Address (Auto Dialer)  
Enter a 3-digit Abbreviated Number which will assign the Relay Email Address of the Relay Station your  
machine will use.  
5. Manager’s Email Address (User’s Parameter)  
Register the Department Manager’s Email Address for supervision and cost control purposes. Once  
registered, the machine will send an email notification to this email address for each Relayed XMT  
Request received from a remote station. The following information is sent.  
(From : The email address of the originating station.)  
(To  
: The telephone number of the destination G3 fax machine.)  
6. Domain Names (User’s Parameter) (See Note 2)  
Register up to 10 Domain Names (up to 30 characters) that your machine will accept Relayed  
Transmission Requests to relay a message to another G3 fax machine via PSTN.  
Ex:Registered Domain Names  
(01): rdnn.mgcs.co.jp  
(02): rdmg.mgcs.co.jp  
(03): panasonic.com  
In the example above, the Relayed XMT Request will be accepted only from the email addresses that  
include the Domain Name of rdnn.mgcs.co.jp, rdmg.mgcs.co.jp or panasonic.com.  
1. This should be different than your machine's Email Address used to receive regular email /  
NOTE  
Internet Fax, as your machine's Email Address is always included in the header of all email  
messages sent. So, anyone receiving an Internet Fax from the machine will easily know the  
Relay XMT Password if it is the same as the Email Address.  
2. If all the Domain Names are left blank, the Internet Fax will accept Relayed XMT Requests  
from any domain.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Relayed Transmission  
Setting Up Your Machine for Relayed Transmission  
Programming the End Receiving Station into your Auto Dialer  
If the Fax Parameter No. 140 (LAN RELAY XMT REQUEST) is set to "Valid", you can enter the Relay  
Address (ABBR No.) by the following procedure.  
To set a One-Touch/ABBR for Relayed Transmission Request  
1:ONE-TOUCH  
2:ABBR NO.  
1
7
2
ONE-TOUCH< >  
PRESS ONE-TOUCH  
1
2
3
Ex:  
<01>  
Press a One-Touch key (01 - 28).  
ENTER EMAIL ADDRESS  
Ex:  
<01>  
To change the input mode (between "ENTER EMAIL  
ADDRESS" and "ENTER TEL. NO."),  
ENTER TEL. NO.  
4
5
EMAIL  
press  
.
<01>  
3961111234  
Enter the telephone number (up to 36 digits).  
If the Relay and the End Receiving Stations are both in  
the same area, omit the Country Code and the Area Code  
from the End Receiving Station. The End Receiving  
Station is a local telephone number as viewed from the  
Relay Station.  
<01>ENTER NAME  
3961111234  
6
<01> ROME  
3961111234  
Enter the station name by using the character keys (up to  
15 characters).  
7
8
Ex:  
R O M E  
<01> RELAY ADDRESS  
❚❚❚  
Continued on the next page...  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Relayed Transmission  
Setting Up Your Machine for Relayed Transmission  
Enter the 3-digit Abbreviated number of the Relay Station  
that you want to assign to this End Receiving Station.  
9
The Abbreviated number must contain the Relay XMT  
Password of the Relay Station.  
<01> RELAY ADDRESS  
001  
0
0
1
Ex:  
ONE-TOUCH< >  
PRESS ONE-TOUCH  
10  
You can now set an additional One-Touch/Abbreviated  
numbers for Relayed Transmission Request by repeating  
the procedures from Steps 3 to 8, or return to standby by  
pressing  
.
STOP  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Relayed Transmission  
Sending Documents via Internet Relay  
Once you have recorded all the necessary parameters in your machine, you can send a document to one or  
multiple G3 fax machines automatically through the Internet Relay Station by using the procedure described  
below. The Internet Relay Station must have all the necessary parameters setup.  
To a Location That Has a Pre-programmed Relay Station  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
<02> STOCKHOLM  
4681111234  
Enter only the telephone number(s) of the End Receiving  
Station(s) using any combination of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
2
3
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Manual Number Dialing (up to 70 stations), press  
after each station is entered. (see Note)  
SET  
• Directory Search Dialing, press after each station is  
entered  
(For details, see pages 108 to 110.)  
Ex:  
* STORE *  
NO.002  
PAGES=001 05%  
The document(s) is stored into memory and your machine  
starts sending the document(s) to the Relay email address  
of the Relay Station with the telephone number for the End  
Receiving Station.  
Ex:End Receiving Station : 4681111234  
(Telephone number)  
* STORE * COMPLETED  
TOTAL PAGES=005 25%  
[see Note 1]  
Relay Station  
After the Relay Station completes its transmission to the  
End Receiving Station(s), your machine receives a COMM.  
Journal from the Relay Station.  
ON LINE *MEM.XMT*  
ID:uk-rly#4681111234  
This Journal confirms whether the Internet Relayed  
Transmission was successful.  
1. If the Relay Station requires a special access number to get an outside line, enter that access  
NOTE  
number first then press  
full number.  
to enter a pause (represented by a "-") before entering the  
PAUSE  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Relayed Transmission  
Sending Documents via Internet Relay  
To a Location That Does Not Have a Pre-programmed Relay Station  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
2
Set document(s) face down.  
RELAY XMT  
ENTER RELAY STATION  
2
5
[001]LONDON RELAY  
Assign a Relay Station by either one of the following  
methods.  
3
• Manual Dialing (press the  
enter the email address for the Relay Station)  
key first, then  
INTERNET  
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Directory Search Dialing  
(For details, see pages 92 to 95.)  
RELAY XMT  
ENTER STATION(S)  
Ex:  
ABBR  
0 0 1  
Enter only the telephone number(s) of the End Receiving  
Station(s) using any combination of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
4
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Manual Number Dialing (up to 70 stations), press  
after each station is entered. (see Note)  
SET  
• Directory Search Dialing, press after each station is  
entered  
(For details, see pages 108 to 110.)  
<02> STOCKHOLM  
4681111234  
Ex:  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Relayed Transmission  
Sending Documents via Internet Relay  
* STORE *  
NO.002  
5
PAGES=001 05%  
The document(s) is stored into memory and your machine  
starts sending the document(s) to the Relay email address  
of the Relay Station with the telephone number for the End  
Receiving Station.  
Ex:End Receiving Station : 4681111234  
(Telephone number)  
* STORE * COMPLETED  
TOTAL PAGES=005 25%  
[see Note 1]  
Relay Station  
After the Relay Station completes its transmission to the  
End Receiving Station(s), your machine receives a COMM.  
Journal from the Relay Station.  
This Journal confirms whether the Internet Relayed  
Transmission was successful.  
ON LINE *MEM.XMT*  
ID:uk-rly#4681111234  
1. If the Relay Station requires a special access number to get an outside line, enter that access  
NOTE  
number first then press  
full number.  
to enter a pause (represented by a "-") before entering the  
PAUSE  
2. The "#" character is not available for the email address of the relay station.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Relayed Transmission  
Sending Document(s) from a PC to a G3 Fax Machine  
Using your email application, you can send any document(s) from your PC as a TIFF-F attachment to one or  
multiple G3 fax machines automatically through the Internet Relay Station.  
The Internet Relay Station (your machine) must be properly setup with all the required parameters.  
To send a Relayed Transmission from your PC using your email application, follow the example below.  
Ex: In the "To:" box of your email application, type the following:  
or  
• Relay XMT Password:sg-rly  
• # + End Receiving Station (with Phone Number):  
• # *+ End Receiving Station (with Abbreviated Dialing Number):  
• # *+ End Receiving Station (with One-Touch Number):  
• # *+ End Receiving Station (with Program Key as a Group Dialing):  
• @ + Relay Station's Domain Name:  
#81331111234 (see Note 1)  
#*001 - #*100 (see Note 1)  
#*1001 - #*1028 (see Note 1)  
#*2001 - #*2004 (see Note 1)  
@singapore.panasonic.co.sg  
Your PC sends the text document(s) to the Relay email address of the Relay Station with the telephone  
number of the End Receiving Station.  
After the Relay Station completes its transmission to the End Receiving Station(s), your PC receives a  
COMM. Journal from the Relay Station. This Journal confirms whether the Internet Relayed Transmission  
was successful.  
1. The "#" and "*" symbol must be entered after the Relay XMT Password as it indicates to your  
NOTE  
machine that a phone number for the End Receiving Station will follow.  
2. If the Relay Station requires a special access number to get an outside line, enter that access  
number first then enter a hyphen (represented by a "-") before entering the full number.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Relayed Transmission  
Sending Document(s) from a PC to a G3 Fax Machine  
A TIFF Converter software is used on your PC to convert document(s) into a "TIFF" file format, which  
allows the Internet FAX to receive the document as an attachment to an email. When you are sending a  
detailed graphic document(s) to a Panasonic Internet Fax, you can specify 400 dpi resolution for better  
clarity.  
Ifax Mailer software is an add-in program for the TIFF Converter that links the email client for MAPI to the  
TIFF converter for the Internet FAX.  
To send a printing image as email from the application to the Internet FAX, you have to convert the file into  
the format that the Internet FAX is allowed to receive and print as an email using the TIFF file creation  
function. You also have to send that file to the Internet FAX as an attached document.  
Ifax Mailer, allows you to automatically create TIFF files by pressing one button form the TIFF Converter for  
the Internet FAX.  
You can download the Panasonic's TIFF Converter and ifax Mailer software and their respective User's  
Guides from any of the following URL addresses.  
http://panasonic.co.jp/pcc/en/  
To simplify the Relay Transmission operation, Panasonic has an Optional Panafax Fax Gateway software.  
Please visit the following URL address for more details:  
http://www.panasonic.com/office  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Relayed Transmission  
Printouts and Reports  
When you use Relayed Transmission, relay station will send the following two reports to help you check and  
keep track of your faxes.  
1. Relay XMT Report (COMM. JOURNAL)  
When the relay station finishes transmitting to the End Receiving Station, it will send a COMM. Journal to  
you when the Fax Parameter No. 143 is set to "Always" or "Inc. Only", this tells you whether the  
transmission was successful or not.  
2. Transmission Journal  
When the Relay Station receives instructions for a relayed transmission, a notification is emailed to the  
registered manager (see "Setting up Your machine as an Internet Relay Station" on page 184).  
Sample Relay XMT Report (COMM. JOURNAL)  
************** -COMM. JOURNAL - ***************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy **** TIME 15:00 ********  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
MODE = RELAYED TRANSMISSION  
FILE NO.= 050 (4)  
START=MMM-dd 15:00  
END=MMM-dd 15:00  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
STN  
NO.  
001  
002  
COMM.  
ONE-TOUCH  
ABBR NO.  
STATION NAME/EMAIL ADDRESS/TELEPHONE NO.  
PAGES  
DURATION  
R-OK  
R-OK  
STOCKHOLM  
ROMA  
001/001  
001/001  
00:00:15  
00:00:15  
- PANASONIC -  
*************************************** - HEAD OFFICE  
- ****** - 201 555 1212 - *******  
Explanation of Contents  
(1) Indication of communication mode  
(2) Start time of communication  
(3) End time of communication  
(4) File number  
:
:
001 to 999  
(5) Sequential number of the stations  
(6) Communication result  
"R-OK" indicates that the Relayed XMT Request was successful.  
3-digit Info Code (see page 226) indicates that the communication has  
failed.  
(7) Telephone Number, Email Address or  
Station Name of the end receiving  
station  
(8) Number of pages transmitted  
(9) Duration of Communication  
:
3-digit number represents the number of pages successfully transmitted.  
1. If you transmit through more than one Relay Station, you will receive a separate Result Report.  
NOTE  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Relayed Transmission  
Printouts and Reports  
Sample Relayed Transmission Notification Email to a Manager  
Month, dd, yyyy  
(1)  
(2)  
Explanation of Contents  
(1) Email address of the sender's Internet Fax (Your machine) or PC  
(2) End Receiving Station's G3 fax telephone number(s)  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selective Reception  
General Description  
Your machine has a special feature, Selective Reception, which can prevent the receiving of unnecessary  
documents (i.e. junk fax, direct mail, etc.).  
Before receiving the document, the last 4 digits of the ID Number received from the sending machine will be  
compared with the last 4 digits of the telephone number programmed in each One-Touch or Abbreviated  
station. When a match is found, your machine will start receiving the document. If a match is not found, your  
machine will cancel the reception and an Information Code 406 will be recorded on the Journal.  
Setting the Selective Reception  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
7
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
4
46 SELECT RCV  
1:INVALID  
3
6
4
2
46 SELECT RCV  
2:VALID  
4
5
1. When the Selective Reception is set, your machine can receive only from those stations which  
are programmed in the built-in auto-dialer.  
NOTE  
2. If your ID number has not been set, your machine might not be able to receive from some  
models. To set your ID number, see page 47.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Password Communications  
General Description  
Password Communications, including Password Transmission and Password Reception will prevent your  
machine from sending a fax to a wrong station or receiving a fax from an unauthorized stations. You can set  
Password Transmission and Password Reception independently, or both together.  
To use Password Transmission, you must set a 4-digit transmission password in advance. The password  
must be shared with other compatible Panasonic machine(s). If the transmission password in your machine  
does not match the transmission password in the other compatible Panasonic machine(s), the transmission  
will fail. You can select password transmission by setting Fax Parameter No. 43 (PASSWORD-XMT) to  
"ON" when you send a document.  
To use Password Reception, you must set a 4-digit receiving password in advance. The password must be  
shared with the other compatible Panasonic machine(s). If the password in your machine does not match  
the receiving password in the other compatible Panasonic machine(s), the reception will fail. Once you set  
password reception and set the parameter to "ON", it stays until you change the setting to "OFF".  
Compatibility with Other Machines  
You can only use password transmission and reception with another Panasonic compatible machine(s)  
listed below.  
• DF-1100  
• DF-1810F  
• DP-2000  
• DP-2500  
• DP-3000  
• DP-3510  
• DP-4510  
• DP-6010  
• DX-600  
• UF-160  
• UF-160M  
• UF-170  
• UF-260  
• UF-270  
• UF-270M  
• UF-280M  
• UF-300  
• UF-312  
• UF-322  
• UF-550  
• UF-560  
• UF-585  
• UF-590  
• UF-595  
• UF-650  
• UF-733  
• UF-744  
• UF-745  
• UF-750  
• UF-750D  
• UF-755  
• UF-755e  
• UF-766  
• UF-770  
• UF-788  
• UF-790  
• UF-880  
• UF-885  
• UF-890  
• UF-895  
• UF-990  
• UF-M500  
• DX-800  
• FP-D250F  
• FP-D350F  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Password Communications  
Setting Password Transmission  
To set transmission password and parameter,  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
7
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
2
4
43PASSWORD-XMT  
❚❚❚❚  
3
4
3
43PASSWORD-XMT  
1:OFF  
Enter a 4-digit Transmission Password.  
Ex: and press  
1234  
1234  
4
5
SET  
1 2 3 4  
43PASSWORD-XMT  
1:OFF  
1
for “OFF” (password is not checked)  
for “ON” (password is checked)  
or  
or  
43PASSWORD-XMT  
2:ON  
2
1234  
6
1. You can change the setting temporarily by using FUNCTION 8-4 (PASSWORD-XMT) for each  
transmission. See page 198 for details.  
NOTE  
2. To change the password, press  
in Step 4. Then re-enter a new one.  
CLEAR  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Password Communications  
Setting Password Reception  
To set the receiving password and parameter,  
SET MODE  
(1-8)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
7
FAX PARAMETER(1-182)  
NO.=  
2
4
44 PASSWORD-RCV  
❚❚❚❚  
3
4
4
44 PASSWORD-RCV  
1:OFF  
Enter a 4-digit Receiving Password.  
1234  
1234  
4
5
1
Ex:  
and press  
SET  
2 3 4  
44 PASSWORD-RCV  
1:OFF  
1
for “OFF” (password is not checked)  
for “ON” (password is checked)  
or  
or  
44 PASSWORD-RCV  
2:ON  
2
1234  
6
1. Once you set the parameter, you cannot select the parameter, “OFF” or “ON”, for each  
NOTE  
reception. It is always “OFF” or “ON” until you change the setting.  
2. To change the password, press  
in Step 4. Then re-enter a new one.  
CLEAR  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Password Communications  
Using Password Transmission  
To use Password Transmission, you can select PASSWORD-XMT “OFF” or “ON” for each Transmission by  
following the procedure below.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
SELECT MODE  
(1-9)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
2
3
8
PASSWD-XMT=OFF  
1:OFF 2:ON  
4
1
PASSWD-XMT=OFF  
1:OFF 2:ON  
4
for “OFF” (password is not checked)  
for “ON” (password is checked)  
or  
or  
PASSWD-XMT=ON  
1:OFF 2:ON  
2
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
5
6
Dial by any combination of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
Manual Number Dialing, press  
after each  
after each  
SET  
SET  
station is entered  
(Up to 70 stations)  
• Directory Search Dialing, press  
station is entered  
(For details, see pages 108 to 110.)  
Ex:  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Password Communications  
7
If your machine's Transmission Password coincides with  
the other station's Transmission Password, your machine  
starts sending the document.  
When transmission is completed, PASSWORD-XMT  
returns to standard setting (“OFF” or “ON”).  
Using Password Reception  
There is no additional operation required once you set the parameter by following the procedure on page  
197. The parameter, “OFF” or “ON”, cannot be selected for each reception. It is always “OFF” or “ON” until  
you change the setting.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Confidential Mailbox  
General Description  
Your machine is equipped with two Confidential Communication features which ensure that the Confidential  
information you send is received only by the person with the correct confidential code.  
Confidential Mailbox  
The confidential mailbox feature can be used as a mailbox to communicate with other compatible models  
using a 4-digit confidential code. The Confidential Mailbox feature receives document(s) with a confidential  
code into memory. These documents can only be printed by the person who has the correct confidential  
code.  
Panasonic  
Compatible  
Model  
Panasonic  
Compatible  
Model  
A
B
Send  
with  
Send  
with  
Conf.Code  
1000  
Conf.Code  
2000  
PanasonicCompatibleModel (Note 5)  
MAILBOX  
Document "A" and "B"  
are stored into memory.  
Panasonic  
Compatible  
B
Model  
Print out  
with  
Conf.Code  
2000  
(Note 5)  
Polling  
with  
Conf.Code  
1000  
A
Compatibility with Other Machines  
Table 1 shows a list of compatible Panasonic models which have the Confidential Mailbox feature. It also  
shows whether or not special settings are required.  
Table 1 : Confidential Mailbox Requirement  
Compatible Model  
Special Settings  
DF-1100 DP-1810F DP-2000 DP-2500 DP-3000 DP-3510 DP-4510 DP-6010  
DX-600 DX-800  
UF-344 UF-550  
UF-745 UF-755  
UF-885 UF-890  
UF-280M UF-312 UF-322 UF-332 UF-333 UF-342  
UF-560 UF-585 UF-590 UF-595 UF-733 UF-744  
UF-755e UF-766 UF-770 UF-788 UF-790 UF-880  
UF-895  
Not required.  
1. If your machine receives two confidential faxes with same confidential code, both documents  
are stored together in the same confidential mailbox.  
NOTE  
2. Up to 10 Mailbox files can be stored in memory. So, you can receive the confidential fax using  
10 different confidential codes.  
3. If the memory overflows, the machine will stop receiving and release the line.  
4. We recommend that optional flash memory card be installed when this function is used. See  
page 239 on Image Memory Capacity.  
5. If confidential faxes were received in the mailbox of UF-733, you cannot poll those documents.  
The UF-733 is designed to print out the received confidential document locally only.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Confidential Mailbox  
Sending a Confidential Document to a Remote Station's Mailbox  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
CONF. COMM.  
(1-5)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
2
3
2
2
CONFIDENTIAL XMT  
CONF. CODE=❚❚❚❚  
1
CONFIDENTIAL XMT  
CONF. CODE=2233  
Enter a 4-digit Confidential Code.  
Ex:  
4
5
2 2 3 3  
ENTER STATION  
THEN PRESS START  
Dial by any one of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Manual Number Dialing  
• Directory Search Dialing  
Ex:  
6
7
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
If necessary, inform the receiving person and tell them the  
Confidential Code.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Confidential Mailbox  
Polling a Confidential Document from a Remote Station's Mailbox  
After you have been informed that someone has transmitted a confidential document to a remote station's  
mailbox, you can poll the confidential document from the remote station by following the procedure below.  
CONF. COMM.  
(1-5)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
2
2
CONFIDENTIAL POLL  
CONF. CODE=❚❚❚❚  
2
CONFIDENTIAL POLL  
CONF. CODE=2233  
Enter a 4-digit Confidential Code.  
Ex:  
3
4
2 2 3 3  
ENTER STATION  
THEN PRESS START  
Dial by any one of the following methods:  
• One-Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Manual Number Dialing  
• Directory Search Dialing  
Ex:  
5
6
<01>(Station name)  
5551234  
1. The confidential file will be erased automatically at the center station after being polled.  
NOTE  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Confidential Mailbox  
Receiving a Confidential Document to Your Machine's Mailbox  
No special setting is required, your machine comes with this feature ready to use. Your machine receives a  
confidential fax the same way it receives a normal fax message. When receiving the confidential fax, the  
display shows the following message (CONF. RCV REPORT) and prints out the Confidential Receive  
Report.  
MESSAGE IN MAIL BOX  
Sample CONF. RCV Report  
*************** -CONF. RCV REPORT- **************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 15:00 ********  
** NOTICE OF CONFIDENTIAL DOCUMENT HELD **  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
FILE NO.  
RECEIVED FROM  
PAGES  
TIME RECEIVED  
040  
PANAFAX  
001  
MMM-dd 15:00  
-PANASONIC  
- ***** -  
-
************************************ -HEAD OFFICE  
201 555 1212- *********  
Explanation of Contents  
(1) File number  
:
:
001 to 999  
(2) Received remote station's ID  
(3) Number of pages received  
(4) Received date and time  
Character ID or Numeric ID  
1. If your machine receives two confidential faxes with same confidential code, both documents  
are stored together in the same confidential mailbox.  
NOTE  
2. Up to 10 Mailbox files can be stored in memory. So, you can receive the confidential fax using  
10 different confidential codes.  
3. If the memory overflows, the machine will stop receiving and release the line.  
4. You can verify whether the unit has received a confidential fax by printing out the File List.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Confidential Mailbox  
Storing a Confidential Document in Your Machine's Mailbox  
Use the following procedure to store a document in a confidential mailbox in your machine. Once the  
confidential document is stored in your machine, it can be polled by another machine.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
CONF. COMM.  
(1-5)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
2
3
2
2
CONFIDENTIAL POLLED  
CONF. CODE=❚❚❚❚  
3
CONFIDENTIAL POLLED  
CONF. CODE=2233  
Enter a 4-digit Confidential Code.  
Ex:  
4
5
2 2 3 3  
* STORE *  
NO.002  
PAGES=001 01%  
The document(s) will be stored into memory.  
If necessary, inform the receiving party of the confidential  
document and tell them the confidential code needed to  
poll the document.  
1. The confidential file will be erased automatically after being polled.  
NOTE  
If you wish to retain the confidential file even after being polled, change the setting of Fax  
Parameter No. 42 (CONF. POLLED FILE SAVE) to "Valid".  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Confidential Mailbox  
Printing Out a Confidential Document from Your Machine's Mailbox  
After you have been notified that someone has transmitted a confidential document to your machine's  
mailbox, use the following procedure to print out the confidential document.  
CONF. COMM.  
(1-5)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
2
2
PRINT CONF. FILE  
CONF. CODE=❚❚❚❚  
4
PRINT CONF. FILE  
CONF. CODE=2233  
Enter the Confidential Code of the document you want to  
print out.  
3
4
Ex:  
2 2 3 3  
* PRINTING *  
PAGE=001/001  
The machine will print out the confidential documents.  
1. The confidential file will be erased automatically after being printed out even if the setting of  
Fax Parameter No. 42 (CONF. POLLED FILE SAVE) is changed to "Valid".  
NOTE  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Confidential Mailbox  
Deleting a Confidential Document Stored in Your Machine's Mailbox  
If your memory becomes full, or you just want to clean out your confidential documents, you may delete one  
or more confidential faxes stored in your machine by using the following procedure.  
There are two types of confidential file deletions, one is to delete the file individually by its Confidential  
Code, and the other is to delete all confidential files in memory.  
To delete a file using Confidential Code  
CONF. COMM.  
(1-5)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
2
2
DELETE CONF. FILE  
CONF. CODE=❚❚❚❚  
5
DELETE CONF. FILE  
CONF. CODE=2233  
Enter a 4-digit Confidential Code.  
Ex:  
3
4
2 2 3 3  
* DELETING *  
CONF. CODE=2233  
To delete all confidential files in memory  
CONF. COMM.  
(1-5)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
2
DELETE CONF. FILE  
CONF. CODE=❚❚❚❚  
2
3
4
5
1
DELETE ALL CONF.  
FILES? 1:YES 2:NO  
* DELETING *  
ALL CONF. FILES  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sub-addressing  
General Description  
The Sub-Addressing function allows you further routing, forwarding or relaying of document(s) to the  
desired recipient(s) when used in combination with Panasonic Internet Fax capable models and/or the  
Networking version of HydraFax/LaserFAX software. This function conforms to the ITU-T recommendation  
for T. Routing-Facsimile Routing utilizing the Sub-Address.  
Example of a Network  
Dial to:  
555 1234  
Sub-address: 0001  
TSI:  
555 9999  
bbb  
aaa  
Fax1  
aaa  
PC2  
PC1  
aaa  
Panasonic Internet Fax  
capable models  
Automatic Routing Table of Panasonic Internet Fax capable models  
(Own Tel. # : 555 1234)  
One-Touch #  
<01>  
Sub-address  
0001  
TSI  
--  
--  
Direction  
PC1  
PC2  
bbb  
<02>  
0002  
<03>  
0003  
555 6789  
Fax1  
Dial to:  
555 1234  
Sub-address: None  
TSI:  
555 6789  
Compatibility with Other Machines  
• Sub-addressing Transmission: DF-1100/DP-135FP/150FP/150FX/DP-2000/2500/3000/3510/4510/6010/DX-800/1000/  
2000/FP-D250F/D350F/UF-332/333/342/344/490/550/560/585/595/770/788/790/880/  
885/895 (see Note 2)  
• Sub-addressing Reception:  
DX-800/1000/2000/DP-2000/2500/3000/3510/4510/6010 with I-FAX Option and DF-  
1100/UF-342/344/550/560/585/595/770/788/880 with PC Interface using the Networking  
version of HydraFax/LaserFAX software.  
Sub-addressing Transmission Methods  
You can send a document with Sub-address information to the desired recipient by the following methods.  
• By registering the Sub-address information into One-Touch/ABBR. Dialing Numbers.  
• By specifying the Sub-address information in the Manual Number Dialing Mode.  
Setting of Routing, Forwarding or Relaying  
You can customize the Automatic Routing to any combination of LAN (Local Area Network), PSTN (Public Switched  
Telephone Network) or PBX Extension with Panasonic Internet Fax capable models and/or HydraFax/LaserFAX Routing  
Table (Please refer to the operating instructions of the applicable Panasonic models and/or the HydraFax/LaserFAX  
User Manual).  
1. HydraFax and LaserFAX are trademarks of Wordcraft International Ltd.  
NOTE  
2. UF-788 with PC Interface Option or the Option ROM installed.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sub-addressing  
Setting the Sub-address into a One-Touch/ABBR. Dialing Numbers  
1:ONE-TOUCH  
2:ABBR NO.  
1
7
2
ONE-TOUCH< >  
PRESS ONE-TOUCH  
1
2
2
to select “One-Touch”.  
to select “ABBR.NO.”.  
or  
1
Ex:  
Ex:  
<01>  
ENTER TEL. NO.  
3
4
Enter the telephone number, press FLASH then enter  
the Sub-address. (Up to 20 digits)  
(Up to 36 digits including telephone number, pauses,  
spaces, FLASH and Sub-address)  
<01>  
Ex:Telephone number = 5551234, Sub-address =2762  
5551234s2762  
Enter as:  
5 5 5 1 2 3 4  
2 7 6 2  
FLASH  
<01> SALES DEPT  
5551234s2762  
5
6
Enter the station name.  
Ex: SALES DEPT  
1. FLASH separates the Sub-address from the Telephone number and is indicated by an "s"  
NOTE  
in the display.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sub-addressing  
Sending a Document with Sub-address  
Using One-Touch/ABBR. Number Dialing  
The operation is the same as for normal dialing  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
<01>(Station name)  
5551234s2762  
Ex:  
2
* STORE *  
NO.001  
PAGES=001 01%  
3
The document is stored into memory and your machine  
starts to dial the number of the station and sends the  
document(s) with Sub-addressing information.  
Using Manual Number Dialing  
Use FLASH to separate the Telephone number and the Sub-address.  
ENTER STATION(S)  
THEN PRESS START 00%  
1
Set document(s) face down.  
Enter the telephone number, press FLASH then enter  
the Sub-address (up to 20 digits).  
(Up to 36 digits including telephone number, pauses,  
spaces, FLASH and Sub-address)  
2
TEL. NO.  
5551234s2762  
Ex:Telephone number = 5551234, Sub-address =2762  
Enter as:  
5 5 5 1 2 3 4  
2 7 6 2  
FLASH  
* STORE *  
NO.001  
PAGES=001 01%  
3
The document is stored into memory and your machine  
starts to dial the number of the station and sends the  
document(s) with Sub-addressing information.  
NOTE  
1. FLASH separates the Sub-address from the Telephone number and is indicated by an "s"  
in the display.  
2. Manual Off-Hook or On-Hook Dialing cannot be used with the Sub-addressing Transmission.  
3. The Sub-address is not transmitted during Manual Redial Mode.  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printout Journals and Lists  
Journals and Lists  
General Description  
To help you maintain records of the documents you sent and received, as well as lists of the numbers you  
record, your machine is equipped to print the following journals and lists: Transaction Journal, Individual  
Transmission Journal, Communication Journal, One-Touch/Abbreviated/Directory Search No. List, Program  
List, Fax Parameter List, Directory Sheet and File List.  
Transaction Journal  
The "Journal" is a record of the last 32 transactions (a transaction is recorded each time you send or receive  
a document). It is printed out automatically after every 32 transactions (See Note 1) or you can print or view  
it manually by using the following procedure:  
PRINT OUT  
(1-7)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
6
JOURNAL  
1:PRINT 2:VIEW  
1
* PRINTING *  
JOURNAL  
1
2
To print a Journal  
3a  
3b  
4
JOURNAL VIEW  
1:XMT ONLY 2:ALL  
To view a Journal  
Select the viewing mode.  
USE THE ∨ ∧ KEYS TO  
SCROLL EACH RECORD  
1
2
to view transmission transactions only  
to view all transactions  
Ex:  
2
You can view the transactions in the journal by pressing  
or . Press to return to standby.  
STOP  
CommunicationResult  
OK: Communication was successful.  
BUSY: Line busy  
STOP: STOP was pressed.  
Date & Time  
P-OK: Reserved transmission was successful under  
memoryfullcondition.  
R-OK: Relayed transmission was successful.  
01/12 10:00 OK P01  
--  
:
LANtransmission  
¤
XMT  
5551234  
3-digit Info Code: Communicationhasfailed  
(Refer to page 224 for details.)  
Number of pages successfully transmitted or received.  
Scroll Marker  
Typeof Communication  
XMT: Transmission  
RCV: Reception  
POL: Polling  
Received ID,  
recorded name,  
dialedtelephonenumber,  
or email address  
: Latest transaction  
: Oldest transaction  
: Only 1 transaction  
FWD: Fax Forward  
1. If you wish to disable the automatic print out of the Transaction Journal, change the setting of  
Fax Parameter No. 13 to "Invalid". (See page 79)  
NOTE  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Journals and Lists  
Individual Transmission Journal (Ind. XMT Journal)  
An Individual Transmission Journal contains the information on the latest transmission.  
PRINT OUT  
(1-7)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
3
6
6:IND. XMT JOURNAL?  
PRESS SET TO PRINT  
6
* PRINTING *  
IND. XMT JOURNAL  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Journals and Lists  
Individual Transmission Journal (Ind. XMT Journal)  
Sample Transaction Journal  
(1)  
(2)  
***************** -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 15:00 ***** P.01  
(3) (4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
(10)  
(11)  
(12)  
NO. COMM. PAGES  
FILE DURATION X/R  
IDENTIFICATION  
DATE  
TIME  
DIAGNOSTIC  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
OK  
--  
--  
OK  
OK  
001/001 149 00:00:52 XMT  
001/001 151 00:00:02 XMT  
003/003 153 00:00:20 XMT  
¤215  
TEST  
MMM-dd 20:04  
MMM-dd 20:07  
MMM-dd 20:09  
C8444B0577000  
01 STN(S) LAN  
01 STN(S) LAN  
LAN  
C0542B0577000  
0800420000000  
0040440A30080  
fax@nwfax1  
[email protected] MMM-dd 20:10  
215  
¤216  
¤217  
003  
001  
154 00:00:21 RCV  
155 00:00:19 RCV  
MMM-dd 20:11  
MMM-dd 20:14  
MMM-dd 21:17  
634  
408 * 003  
000/003 156 00:00:00 XMT  
00:02:14 XMT  
49  
50  
OK  
OK  
000/001 159 00:00:07 XMT  
001/001 160 00:00:16 XMT  
TEL XMT  
TEL XMT  
MMM-dd 20:18  
MMM-dd 20:19  
CA40462000000  
C8444B0577000  
<< CONTINUE >>  
(13)  
-PANASONIC  
-
************************************ -HEAD OFFICE  
- ***** -  
201 555 1212- *********  
(15)  
(14)  
Sample Individual Transmission Journal (Ind. XMT Journal)  
(1)  
(2)  
************** -IND. XMT JOURNAL- **************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 15:00 *********  
(10)(11)  
(3)  
DATE/TIME  
= MMM-dd-yyyy 09:00  
JOURNAL No. = 21  
COMM. RESULT = OK  
(4)  
(5)  
PAGE(S)  
DURATION  
FILE No.  
MODE  
= 001/001  
(7)  
= 00:00:16  
(6)  
= 010  
(16)  
(17)  
(18)  
(19)  
= MEMORY TRANSMISSION  
DESTINATION = [001] / 555 1234 /ABCDEFG  
RECEIVED ID =  
RESOLUTION  
= STD  
(13)  
-PANASONIC  
-
******************************-HEAD OFFICE  
-*******-  
201 555 1212- *****************  
(15)  
(14)  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Journals and Lists  
Individual Transmission Journal (Ind. XMT Journal)  
Explanation of Contents  
(1) Printout date  
(2) Printout time  
(3) Journal number  
(4) Communication result  
:
"OK" indicates that the communication was successful.  
"BUSY" indicates that the communication has failed because of busy line.  
"STOP" indicates that STOP was pressed during communication.  
"P-OK" indicates that memory overflow or document misfeeding occurred  
while storing the documents into memory for transmission but successfully  
stored document(s) was sent.  
"R-OK" indicates that the Relayed XMT or Confidential Communication was  
successful.  
"- -" indicates LAN transmission. (See Note 2)  
"3-digit Info Code (See page 226) indicates that the communication has  
failed.  
(5) Number of pages transmitted or : The 3-digit number is the number of pages successfully transmitted or  
received  
received.  
When the documents are stored into memory, two 3-digit numbers will  
appear.  
The first 3-digit number represents the number of pages successfully  
transmitted.  
The second 3-digit number represents the total number of pages that were  
attempted to be transmitted.  
Asterisk "*" indicates that the quality of some received copies was poor.  
001 to 999 (If the communication is stored into memory, a file number is  
assigned for each communication.)  
(6) File number  
:
:
(7) Duration of communication  
(8) Type of communication  
"XMT" means Transmission  
"RCV" means Reception  
"POL" means Polling  
"FWD" means Fax Forward  
(9) Remote station identification  
:
:
Name : Recorded name in One-Touch or ABBR. Numbers or remote station's  
Character ID.  
¤ number : Dialed telephone number.  
Number : Remote station's ID number.  
Email address  
(10) Communication date  
(11) Communication Start time  
(12) Diagnostic  
For service personnel only  
The 2-digits number is the number of final destinations.  
" STN(S) LAN" indicates LAN transmission.  
"(MDN) LAN" indicates LAN transmission with Delivery Notice.  
"(Comm. JNL) LAN" indicates LAN transmission for Communication Journal.  
Up to 25 characters  
Up to 20 digits  
Up to 16 characters  
Transmission or memory transmission  
One-Touch or ABBR. No./Email Address or Telephone Number/Recorded  
Name  
(13) Own LOGO  
:
:
:
:
:
(14) Own ID number  
(15) Own Character ID  
(16) Type of communication  
(17) Destination  
If not : Email Address or Telephone number  
Character ID or ID number  
"STD" means standard resolution  
(18) Received remote station's ID  
(19) Resolution  
:
:
"FINE" means fine resolution  
"S-FINE" means super fine resolution  
1. Email transmission sent to multiple locations is recorded as a single transaction on the Journal.  
2. The communication result shows "OK" when the sender receives the DELIVERY NOTICE as a  
response for mail from the other party. It usually takes time until the DELIVERY NOTICE is  
returned; so "--" is shown immediately after the sending. When the DIRECT IFAX XMT is  
successfully communicated, the result field also shows "OK".  
NOTE  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Journals and Lists  
Communication Journal (Comm. Journal)  
The Communication Journal (Comm. Journal) lets you verify whether the transmission or polling was  
successful. You may select the printout condition (Off/Always/Inc. only) in Fax Parameter No. 12.  
Sample COMM. JOURNAL  
************** - COMM. JOURNAL - ***************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy **** TIME 15:00 *********  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
MODE = MEMORY TRANSMISSION  
START=MMM-dd 14:50  
END=MMM-dd 15:00  
FILE NO.= 050 (4)  
(5)  
STN  
NO.  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
(10)  
DURATION  
COMM. ONE-TOUCH/  
ABBR NO.  
STATION NAME/EMAIL ADDRESS/TELEPHONE NO. PAGES  
001  
002  
003  
004  
OK  
OK  
407  
BUSY  
<01>  
<02>  
<03>  
¤
SERVICE DEPT.  
SALES DEPT.  
ACCOUNTING DEPT.  
021 111 1234  
001/001  
00:01:30  
00:01:25  
00:01:45  
00:00:00  
001/001  
000/001  
000/001  
- PANASONIC -  
- ****** - 201 555 1212 - *******  
************************************* - HEAD OFFICE  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Journals and Lists  
Communication Journal (Comm. Journal)  
Explanation of Contents  
(1) Indication of communication mode  
(2) Start time of communication  
(3) End time of communication  
(4) File number  
: 001 to 999 (When the communication is stored into memory, a file number is  
assigned for each communication.)  
(5) Station number  
: Sequential number of the Stations.  
(6) Communication result  
: "OK" indicates that the communication was successful.  
"BUSY" indicates that the communication has failed because of busy line.  
"STOP" indicates that STOP was pressed during communication.  
"P-OK" indicates that memory overflow or document misfeeding occurred  
while storing the documents into memory for transmission but successfully  
stored document(s) was sent.  
"R-OK" indicates that the Relayed XMT or Confidential Communication was  
successful.  
"- -" indicates LAN transmission.  
"3-digit Info Code (See page 226) indicates that the communication has  
failed.  
In this case, the machine will print out the attached report with first page of  
your document as shown on the previous page.  
(7) One-Touch/Abbreviated number or : ¤ mark indicates dialed by direct number dial.  
¤ mark  
(8) Recorded name in the Phone  
Book, direct dialing number, or  
email address  
(9) Number of pages transmitted or : The 3-digit number is the number of pages successfully transmitted or  
received  
received.  
When the documents are stored into memory, two 3-digit numbers will  
appear.  
The first 3-digit number represents the number of pages successfully  
transmitted.  
The second 3-digit number represents the total number of pages that were  
attempted to be transmitted.  
(10) Duration of communication  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Journals and Lists  
One-Touch/Abbreviated and Directory Search List  
To print a One-Touch/Abbreviated Number and Directory Search List of the telephone numbers you have  
stored.  
PRINT OUT  
(1-7)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
3
6
2:ONE-TCH/ABBR LIST?  
PRESS SET TO PRINT  
2
1:ONE-TOUCH/ABBR NO.  
2:DIR. SEARCH  
* PRINTING *  
ONE-TOUCH/ABBR LIST  
1
2
4
for One-Touch/ABBR. Number List  
for Directory Search List  
* PRINTING *  
DIR. SEARCH LIST  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Journals and Lists  
One-Touch/Abbreviated and Directory Search List  
Sample One-Touch List  
*************** -ONE-TOUCH LIST- ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 11:11 *** P.01  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(7)  
ONE- STATION NAME  
TOUCH  
EMAIL ADDRESS / TELEPHONE NO.  
ROUTING SUB-ADDR (5) ROUTING TSI (6)  
RELAY ADDR (ABBR NO.)  
<01> John Smith  
<02> Jane Smith  
<03> Bob Jones  
<04> Panafax1  
<05> Panafax2  
¤201 555 3456  
4452  
¤201 555 1212  
1212  
123456  
4827  
+1 201 123 4567  
212 555 1234  
201 555 1212  
[001]  
[002]  
+81 03 5251 1234  
1773  
+81 0467 5251 1234  
NO. OF STATION = 05 (4)  
-PANASONIC  
-
************************************************-HEAD OFFICE - ***** - 201 555 1212- *********  
Sample ABBR. Number List  
*************** -ABBR NO. LIST- ******************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 11:11 *** P.01  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(7)  
ABBR STATION NAME  
NO.  
EMAIL ADDRESS / TELEPHONE NO.  
ROUTING SUB-ADDR (5) ROUTING TSI (6)  
RELAY ADDR (ABBR NO.)  
[001] John Smith  
[002] Jane Smith  
[003] Bob Jones  
[004] Panafax1  
[005] Panafax2  
¤201 555 3456  
4452  
+1 201 123 4567  
212 555 1234  
201 555 1212  
[009]  
[010]  
¤201 555 1212  
1212  
123456  
4827  
+81 03 5251 1234  
1773  
+81 0467 5251 1234  
NO. OF STATION = 005 (4)  
-PANASONIC  
-
************************************************-HEAD OFFICE - ***** - 201 555 1212- *********  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Journals and Lists  
One-Touch/Abbreviated and Directory Search List  
Sample Directory Search List  
*************** -DIR. SEARCH LIST- ******************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 11:11 *** P.01  
(8)  
(2)  
(1)  
(3)  
(7)  
STATION NAME  
ONE-TOUCH/ EMAIL ADDRESS / TELEPHONE NO.  
ABBR NO.  
[003]  
ROUTING SUB-ADDR (5) ROUTING TSI (6)  
RELAY ADDR (ABBR NO.)  
[B]  
[J]  
Bob Jones  
John Smith  
Jane Smith  
Panafax1  
123456  
201 555 1212  
+1 201 123 4567  
212 555 1234  
[001]  
[002]  
[004]  
[005]  
¤201 555 3456  
4452  
[009]  
[010]  
¤201 555 1212  
1212  
[K]  
[M]  
4827  
+81 03 5251 1234  
PAnafax2  
1773  
+81 0467 5251 1234  
NO. OF STATIONS = 005 (4)  
-PANASONIC  
-
************************************************-HEAD OFFICE - ***** - 201 555 1212- *********  
(1) One-Touch number or Abbreviated number  
(2) Station name recorded in the machine  
(3) Telephone number recorded in the machine  
Email address recorded in the machine  
¤number  
: <nn>= One-Touch number, [nnn] = Abbreviated number  
: Up to 15 characters  
: Up to 36 digits (Telephone number)  
: Up to 60 characters (Email address)  
: Telephone Number programmed into One-Touch / ABBR NO.  
(4) Number of recorded One-Touch and ABBR.  
numbers  
(5) Routing Sub-address  
(6) Routing TSI  
: Up to 20 digits  
: Up to 20 digits  
: 3-digit  
(7) Relay Address  
(8) The first letter of station name recorded in your  
machine  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Journals and Lists  
Program List  
To print a Program List of the Dialing Patterns that you have previously entered into the Program Keys.  
PRINT OUT (1-7)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
2
3
6
3:PROGRAM LIST?  
PRESS SET TO PRINT  
3
* PRINTING *  
PROGRAM LIST  
Sample Program List  
*************** -PROGRAM LIST- ******************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 15:00 *******  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM NAME  
TYPE  
TIMER  
ABBR NOS.  
[P1]  
[P2]  
[P3]  
TIMER XMT  
TIMER POLL  
PROG. A  
XMT  
POLL  
POLL  
12:00  
19:00  
-----  
[001]  
[002]  
[001] [002]  
-PANASONIC  
- ***** -  
-
************************************ -HEAD OFFICE  
201 555 1212- *********  
Explanation of Contents  
(1) Program key  
(2) Program name  
:
Up to 15 characters  
(3) Type of communication  
: "XMT" indicates transmission.  
"POLL" indicates polling.  
"ABBR/GRP" indicates that the Program key is programmed as a group key.  
"ONE-TOUCH" indicates that the Program key is programmed as a One-  
Touch key.  
(4) Timer  
: Indicates the starting time.  
"---- " indicates that the Program key contains "non-deferred" program.  
(5) Numbers recorded in the program : One-Touch/ABBR. numbers  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Journals and Lists  
FAX Parameter List  
PRINT OUT  
(1-7)  
ENTER NO. OR ∨ ∧  
1
6
4:FAX PARAM. LIST?  
PRESS SET TO PRINT  
4
2
* PRINTING *  
FAX PARAMETER LIST  
3
Sample FAX Parameter List  
*************** -FAX PARAMETER LIST- ************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 15:00 **** P.01  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
PARAMETER  
NUMBER  
DESCRIPTION  
SELECTION  
CURRENT  
SETTING  
STANDARD  
SETTING  
(7)001  
* 002  
CONTRAST  
RESOLUTION (HOME)  
(HOME)  
(1:Normal  
(1:Standard  
4:Halftone(Fine)  
2:Lighter  
2:Fine  
3:Darker)  
3:S-Fine  
1
1
1
5:Halftone(S-Fine)) 2  
099  
MEMORY SIZE  
(4MB) (6)  
-PANASONIC  
- ***** -  
-
************************************ -HEAD OFFICE  
201 555 1212- *********  
Explanation of Contents  
(1) Parameter number  
(2) Description  
(3) Selection  
:
"(HOME)" means home position setting.  
(4) Current setting  
:
:
"----" indicates code or password is not set. When the code or password is set, it is shown  
in parenthesis.  
(5) Standard setting  
(6) Memory size  
Factory preset standard setting  
(7) Changed setting  
:
"*" indicates that the Factory preset setting was changed.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Journals and Lists  
Toner Cartridge Order Forms  
To print the Toner Cartridge Order Forms  
1:CLEAN ROLLER?  
3:PRINT ORDER FORM?  
1
7
8
* PRINTING *  
TONER ORDER FORM  
3
2
Sample Toner Cartridge Order Form  
**********************************  
TONER CARTRIDGE ORDER FORM  
**********************************  
>
<
**** The toner supply in your machine is running low ****  
To order a replacement Cartridge from your Authorized Dealer  
by Phone:  
by Fax:  
Thank you for your order.  
Customer Name and Address  
==========================  
Ship to:______________________________  
______________________________________  
______________________________________  
Attention:____________________________  
Phone No.:____________________________  
Customer ID:__________________________  
Toner Cartridge: UG-5510  
Bill to: _______________________________  
_______________________________________  
_______________________________________  
Attention: _____________________________  
Phone No.: _____________________________  
P.O. No.(if required): _________________  
Serial No.: ____________________________  
/
/
______________________________________  
Print your name and title  
_______________________________________  
Signature & Date  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Problem Solving  
Troubleshooting  
If You Have Any of These Problems  
Mode  
Symptom  
Cause / Action  
Page  
During Transmission  
Document doesn't  
feed/multiple feed  
1. Check that your document is free of staples and paper 86  
clips, and that it is not greasy or torn.  
2. Check that your document is the right type to send through 86  
a fax machine by consulting the list on "Documents You  
Cannot Send". If your document has the characteristics  
listed, make a photocopy of your document and send the  
copy instead.  
3. Check that the document is loaded properly.  
4. Adjust the ADF Pressure.  
Document jam  
Does not stamp  
The information code 031 will appear on the display if the 232  
document becomes jammed.  
1. Check if Stamp LED is lit.  
2. Check Fax Parameter No. 04 and No. 28 settings.  
Stamp too light  
Replace stamp.  
Transmission Copy  
Quality  
Vertical lines on the  
Check own copy quality. If copy is OK, your machine has no 233  
transmitted document problem, report to the receiving party that they have a  
problem. If copy is NG, clean the Document Scanning Area.  
Transmitted document 1. Make sure the document is set face down.  
is blank  
2. Check own copy quality. If copy is OK, your machine has 233  
no problem, report to the receiving party that they have a  
problem. If copy is NG, clean the Document Scanning  
Area.  
During Reception  
No recording paper  
Recording paper jam  
The information code 010 will appear on the display if the  
paper runs out.  
The information code 001, 002, 007 or 008 will appear on the 231  
display if the paper gets jammed.  
Recording paper  
doesn't advance into  
machine  
Make sure that there is paper in the Paper Cassette. Follow  
the instructions for loading paper.  
Recording paper  
doesn't eject after  
printing  
Check to see if the recording paper is jammed inside of the 231  
machine.  
Recording papers are 1. Check if Fax Parameter No. 65 is set to valid.  
not stacked in  
2. If memory becomes full during reception, the machine will 242  
start to print from the 1st page received. We recommend  
that optional flash memory card is installed if this symptom  
occurs frequently.  
sequence. Machine  
does not print from the  
last page received.  
Document auto  
Check Print Reduction settings.  
reduction doesn't work  
Out of toner  
The information code 041 will appear on the display if the 34  
Toner Cartridge runs out of toner.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Mode  
Symptom  
Cause / Action  
Page  
Print Copy Quality  
Vertical lines printing  
on the received  
document  
Print out a Journal report (e.g. FUNCTION, 6, 1 , SET and 1) 210  
and check quality to make sure whether your machine has  
trouble.  
If Journal report quality is OK, your machine has no problem,  
report to the sending party that they have a problem.  
If copy is NG, replace the Toner Cartridge.  
Fuzzy print  
1. Make sure you are using the correct paper for the best 241  
possible print quality.  
2. Try reversing the recording paper to the other side.  
Missing dots or lines/  
inconsistent darkness  
within print  
1. Make sure you are using the correct paper for the best 241  
possible print quality.  
2. Replace the Toner Cartridge.  
Fading print  
Your Toner Cartridge may be running out of toner. Replace  
the Toner Cartridge.  
Faint print  
You may need to choose a different paper for the best 241  
possible print quality.  
Communication  
No dial tone  
No auto answer  
1. Check the connection of the telephone line.  
2. Check the telephone line.  
1. Check the connection of the telephone line.  
2. Check the Reception mode setting.  
3. If the Fax Parameter No. 13 (AUTO JOURNAL PRINT) is  
set to "Valid" (default setting) and the machine is printing  
the received document from memory, which also happens  
to be the 32th transaction, the machine will not auto answer  
until the Transaction Journal completes printing.  
Cannot transmit or  
receive  
An information code will be shown on the display. Refer to the 226  
information code table to find out the trouble.  
No Unit Operation  
No unit operation  
To reset the machine, turn-off the Power Supply for a few  
seconds then turn it on again.  
Continued on the next page...  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Mode  
Symptom  
Cause / Action  
Page  
TAM Interface Trouble Cannot utilize the  
This feature is not compatible. The fax machine is designed to  
--  
in Unattended TAM I/F remote turn-on feature answer after 8 rings if the TAM does not answer.  
Mode (OUT Mode)  
of the telephone  
answering machine  
(TAM). The fax  
machine always  
answers after the 8th  
ring.  
Fax machine will not  
start up when the  
telephone answering  
machine is set to give  
only an outgoing  
TAM that gives outgoing announcement only is not  
compatible. The fax machine will work with a TAM that will  
record Incoming message (ICM).  
--  
message (OGM).  
A beep...beep sound is Speak a little slower between each word while recording an  
--  
--  
recorded on the  
telephone answering  
machine.  
outgoing message (OGM).  
Fax machine starts up Make sure the outgoing message (OGM) does not have a  
in the middle of the  
outgoing message  
even though the caller  
wants to leave a voice  
message.  
silent pause longer than 5 seconds.  
Cannot record any  
incoming message  
(ICM). The fax machine  
always starts up at the  
end of the OGM and  
before the tape  
Set Fax Parameter No. 20 (Silent Detection) to "Invalid".  
And, instruct the calling party to press  
touch-tone phone during the OGM to start up your fax  
machine remotely.  
twice on their  
advances to the end of  
last ICM. (Your TAM  
only uses a single  
cassette tape to give  
OGM and record ICM.)  
Cannot receive from a Set Fax Parameter No. 20 (Silent Detection) to "Valid".  
machine that does not  
send CNG signal (a  
short beep tone every  
3 seconds) after  
dialing.  
Or, instruct the calling party to press  
tone phone during the OGM to start up your fax machine  
remotely.  
twice on their touch-  
Cannot retrieve  
Set Fax Parameter No. 20 (Silent Detection) to "Invalid".  
message from the  
answering machine  
remotely, the fax  
machine always starts  
up after the command  
code is entered.  
Cannot receive a fax  
message, but can  
Check your outgoing message, if it is too long, the calling fax  
machine may have timed out. Try to shorten your outgoing  
--  
record voice message. message to less than 15 seconds, or ask the calling party to  
program your telephone number in their fax machine with 3  
pauses and a "#" at the end. (ex. 5551212 PAUSE PAUSE  
PAUSE #)  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Mode  
Symptom  
Cause / Action  
Increase the ring count for detection on the telephone  
start to receive with the answering machine.  
Page  
TAM Interface Trouble Fax machine will not  
In Unattended Fax  
Mode (OUT Mode)  
--  
telephone answering  
machine in the auto-  
answer mode.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Information Codes  
When something unusual occurs, the display may show one of the Information Codes listed below. These  
will help you to identify and correct the problem.  
Info.  
Code  
Meaning  
Action  
Page  
001  
Recording paper jammed when feeding from the 1st Remove the jammed paper.  
cassette.  
002  
007  
008  
Recording paper jammed when feeding from the 2nd Remove the jammed paper.  
cassette.  
Recording paper did not completely exit out of Remove the Toner Cartridge and remove the 231  
machine.  
jammed paper.  
Paper cassette is opened while paper is feeding.  
Remove the jammed paper and close the 231  
cassette.  
010  
011  
017  
No recording paper.  
Load the recording paper.  
--  
Recording Paper Cassette is not installed properly.  
Incorrect paper size loaded in the Paper Cassette.  
Install the Recording Paper Cassette.  
Load the Paper Cassette with proper paper  
size (A4, LTR or LGL).  
030  
031  
Document is misfeeding.  
1. Reload the document properly.  
2. Remove the document jam.  
3. Adjust ADF.  
Document paper is too long or jammed.  
Document length exceeds 78.8 inches (2 meters).  
1. Reload the document properly.  
2. Remove the document jam.  
041  
043  
045  
060  
061  
400  
Out of toner.  
Replace the Toner Cartridge.  
Toner is getting low.  
Toner Cartridge is not installed.  
Printer Cover is open.  
ADF Door is open.  
Install the Toner Cartridge.  
Close the Printer Cover.  
Close the ADF Door.  
--  
--  
During initial handshake, receiving station did not 1. Check with the other party.  
--  
respond or communication error occurred.  
2. Reload the document and send again.  
401  
Remote station required a Receiving Password to Check the remote station.  
--  
receive the document.  
Program your ID Number (Fax Telephone  
Remote station does not have Confidential Mailbox.  
Remote station requires the sending unit’s ID Number.  
(Fax Telephone Number)  
402  
403  
During initial handshake, communication error Reload the document and send again.  
occurred.  
--  
No polling capability at the remote side.  
Ask remote side to set "POLLED=ON".  
--  
--  
404/405 During initial handshake, communication error Reload the document and send again.  
occurred.  
406  
Transmission Password does not match.  
Receiving Password does not match.  
Received from an unauthorized station in Selective  
Reception mode.  
Check the password or the telephone number 194  
in One-Touch or Abbreviated station.  
407  
No confirmation from the receiving station for the Wait a few minutes and send again.  
previous page sent.  
--  
408/409 Remote side confirmation of previous page is illegible. Wait a few minutes and send again.  
--  
--  
410  
411  
Communication aborted by the transmitting side.  
Polling password does not match.  
Check with the other party.  
Check the polling password.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Information Codes  
Info.  
Code  
Meaning  
Action  
Page  
412  
414  
415  
No data from the transmitting side.  
Polling password does not match.  
Polling transmission error.  
Check with the other party.  
Check the polling password.  
Check the polling password.  
Check with the other party.  
--  
--  
416/417 Received data has too many errors.  
418/419  
420/421 Machine goes to receiving mode, but receives no 1. Remote side misdial.  
--  
command from the transmitting side.  
2. Check with the other party.  
Check with the other party.  
Check with the other party.  
Check with the other party.  
422/427 Interface is incompatible.  
--  
--  
430/434 Communication error occurred while receiving.  
436/490 Received data has too many errors.  
--  
456  
• Unit received a confidential document or was 1. Print a File List and check the contents.  
requested to be polled of a confidential document 2. Wait until unit finishes printing.  
under any of following conditions:  
1. Not enough space in memory to receive the  
confidential document.  
2. Confidential Mailbox is full.  
3. While printing received document.  
• Unit was requested to relay a document.  
492/493/ Communication error occurred while receiving.  
494  
Check with the other party.  
Check with the other party.  
--  
495  
Telephone line disconnected.  
--  
--  
501/502 Communication error occurred using the internal V.34 Check with the other party.  
Modem.  
540/541/ Communication error occurred while transmitting.  
1. Reload the document and send again.  
--  
542/543/  
544  
2. Check with the other party.  
550  
Telephone line disconnected.  
Check with the other party.  
Check with the other party.  
--  
--  
552/553/ Communication error occurred while receiving.  
554/555  
580  
Sub-address transmission to a unit that has no Sub- Check the remote station.  
address function.  
581  
Sub-address Password transmission to a unit that has Check the remote station.  
no Password Sub-address function.  
601  
623  
630  
631  
634  
ADF Door was opened during ADF transmission.  
No document loaded on the ADF.  
Close the ADF Door and send again.  
--  
Reload the document and send again.  
Reload the document and send again.  
Reload the document and send again.  
Redial was not successful due to a busy line.  
During dialing, STOP was pressed.  
--  
--  
Redial was not successful due to no response from Check the telephone number and send again.  
the called station or wrong number dialed.  
--  
Note: If busy tone was not detected, the machine will  
only redial once.  
638  
711  
Power failure occurred during the communication.  
Incorrect LDAP settings.  
Check the power cord and plug.  
Check the LDAP Server Name, LDAP Log in  
Name, LDAP Password, LDAP Search Base.  
712  
714  
715  
Incorrect email address.  
Check the registered email address.  
Check the IP Address of the SMTP Server  
with the Network Administrator.  
--  
--  
--  
Cannot Log on to the LAN.  
TCP/IP connection timed out.  
Check the 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable  
connection. An unexpected LAN problem  
occurred. Contact the Network Administrator.  
Check the Internet Fax Parameter settings.  
Verify the IP Address, Default Gateway IP  
Address, SMTP Server IP Address.  
Continued on the next page...  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Information Codes  
Info.  
Code  
Meaning  
Action  
Page  
716  
717  
718  
Cannot logon to the designated SMTP Server.  
Check the SMTP Server IP Address setting.  
Contact the Network Administrator.  
--  
Incomplete SMTP Protocol transmission. SMTP SMTP Server is defective.  
Server’s hard disk may be full. Contact the Network Administrator.  
--  
--  
Page Memory Overflow occurred while receiving Check the document size and resolution.  
printing data. The paper size selected within your Ask originator to re-send in a supported size  
application to print is larger than the paper size loaded and resolution.  
in the cassette(s).  
719  
Received data via LAN is in a format that is not Ask the originator to re-send with a supported  
--  
supported.  
file attachment format:  
* In a TIFF-F format.  
* Image data conforming to recording paper  
size.  
720  
721  
Cannot connect to the POP Server. (Incorrect POP Check the POP Server IP Address.  
Server IP Address) POP Server is down. Contact the Network Administrator.  
Cannot connect to the POP Server. (User Name or Check the POP User Name and Password or  
--  
--  
Password error)  
the APOP settings.  
Contact the Network Administrator.  
722  
Failed to obtain the Network Parameters (such as: IP 1. Check the LAN Cable connection.  
Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP Address, 2. Contact your Network Administrator and  
etc.) from the DHCP server.  
verify whether the DHCP is available on  
your network. If it is not, change the Fax  
Parameter No. 169 (DHCP CLIENT) to  
“Invalid” and set the other Network  
Parameters manually (see page 16).  
725  
726  
728  
DNS Server connection timed out. DNS Server is Check the DNS Server IP Address.  
--  
--  
down.  
Contact the Network Administrator.  
Received an error response from the DNS Server.  
Check the POP Server Name.  
Check the SMTP Server Name.  
The document was sent to the Internet Fax in an Change the XMT File Format (Fax Parameter  
incompatible file format (PDF).  
#177) to "TIFF".  
Note: PDF file format is only used when sending an  
Internet Fax to a PC  
729  
730  
731  
Failed to authenticate (SMTP AUTHENTICATION) Check the SMTP AUTHENT. User Name and  
when connecting with the SMTP server.  
Password.  
Contact the Network Administrator.  
Cannot retrieve the Journal nor program the Internet Check that the Fax Parameter No. 158 (PC  
Parameters and the Auto Dialer remotely via email REMOTE UPDATE) is set to "2:Valid".  
from a PC.  
--  
The dialer buffer for manual dialing was full (70 Request the originator to re-send the Relay  
stations) when the Relay Transmission Request was Transmission Request after the reserved  
received.  
communication is finished.  
800/816/ Unit was requested to relay  
a
document or Check with the other party.  
--  
825  
815  
870  
Confidential Communication but has no capability.  
Mailbox is full.  
Memory overflow occurred while storing documents 1. Transmit documents without storing into 112  
into memory for transmission.  
memory.  
2. Install Optional Flash Memory Card.  
1. After identifying the problem and verifying the recommended action, if the information Codes  
keep reoccuring or for help on Information Codes that appear on your machine but are not  
listed above, please contact your local Panasonic Authorized Dealer.  
NOTE  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Email ABBR Programming Errors  
Error Message Sent to the Sender  
Error messages that are emailed from your machine to the original sender during remote programming of  
the Auto Dialer via email.  
Error Message  
Possible Cause  
1
2
3
4
5
554 Data transfer error (broken header)  
The header or sub header decoding is being processed while the  
message finished, try again.  
554 Data transfer error (broken data)  
554 Data transfer error (FAX module)  
Multiple contents are present and being processed while the  
message finished, try again.  
Data transfer error occurred in the FAX module while communicating  
with the LAN module, try again.  
554 MIME attachment not supported  
(message/file)  
MIME attachment is not supported during this operation, re-send  
using plain text in the message body only.  
554 MIME format not supported  
MIME file type is not supported, re-send using plain text in the  
message body only.  
6
7
554 G3 relay permission denied  
554 Relay address unknown  
The requested domain for Relayed XMT is not registered.  
The telephone number of end receiving station for the Relayed XMT  
is unknown.  
8
9
554 Memory full (FAX module)  
554 Data transfer error  
FAX Memory is full, try again later.  
Other errors not listed above, try again later.  
Internet FAX Return Receipt Errors Messages  
Error messages that are printed on the Internet Fax Return Receipt when remote programming of the Auto  
Dialer via email fails.  
Error Message  
Format Error : <@command block, the The block termination command "@end" is missing in the  
"@end" command is missing.> "@command" block, add the "@end" command and try again.  
Format Error <@begin block, the The block start command "@begin" is missing in the "@begin" block,  
"@begin" command is missing.> add the "@begin" command and try again.  
Format Error : <@begin block, the "@end" The block termination command "@end" is missing in the "@begin"  
command is missing.> block, add the "@end" command and try again.  
Format Error <@system block, the The block termination command "@end" is missing in the "@system"  
"@end" command is missing.> block, add the "@end" command and try again.  
Format Error <@sender block, the The block termination command "@end" is missing in the "@sender"  
"@end" command is missing.> block, add the "@end" command and try again.  
Format Error:<@domain block, the "@end" The block termination command "@end" is missing in the "@domain"  
command is missing.> block, add the "@end" command and try again.  
Format Error : <@program block, the The block termination command "@end" is missing in the  
"@end" command is missing.> "@program" block, add the "@end" command and try again.  
Format Error <@system block, the The system block start command "@system" is missing in the  
"@system" command is missing.> "@system" block, add the "@system" command and try again.  
Permission denied <Fax Forward Change the Fax Forward parameter to "Invalid" and try again.  
parameter is set to "Valid".>  
Possible Cause  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
:
:
:
:
10 Permission denied : <Fax machine is busy Try again later when the machine is not busy.  
performing a task.>  
Continued on the next page...  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Email ABBR Programming Errors  
Error Message  
Possible Cause  
11 Error : <Programmed ABBR overwrite Can not overwrite existing programmed data, use the "Delete"  
prohibited. Use open ABBR only.> command to erase the existing data first.  
12 Permission denied  
incorrect.>  
:
<Password is Correct the password and try again.  
13 Permission denied  
:
<Remote Dialer Set the Remote Dialer Update parameter to "Valid".  
Update parameter is set to "Invalid".>  
14 Format Error : <error line>  
The format of the Entry is incorrect / incomplete or the data string for  
each station is not defined within a single line.  
15 Warning : <error line>  
The format of the Entry is incorrect or the number of characters  
entered, exceed the maximum allowed in the field. Correct it and try  
again.  
16 Warning : Field limit exceeded<error line> The maximum number of Station Name, Domain Name, Sender  
Name, Program Name, etc were exceeded.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam  
If the recording paper becomes jammed in the machine, the display will show an Information Code 001,  
002, 007 or 008.  
To clear the jam, Info. Code 001, 002 or 008  
(1) Slide out the Paper Cassette and remove  
1
the Paper Cassette Cover.  
(2) Remove the jammed or wrinkled paper and  
reload the recording paper into the paper  
cassette.  
To clear the jam, Info. Code 007  
(1) Open the Printer Cover.  
1
(2) Remove the Toner Cartridge.  
(3) Remove the jammed paper.  
Note: 1 If at all possible, try removing the  
jammed paper from inside of the  
unit first (as shown in the upper  
figure) to prevent toner that has  
not been fused on the paper from  
rubbing off and dirtying the Fuser  
Roller.  
2 To remove the jammed paper  
from the rear of the unit (as  
shown in the lower figure),  
remove the Recording Paper  
Tray Assembly first and gently  
pull the jammed paper straight  
out; taking care not to tear it.  
1. The Recording Paper Jam message display is reset only by opening and closing of the Printer  
Cover.  
NOTE  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Clearing a Document Jam  
If a document becomes jammed in the machine, the display will show the Information Code 030 or 031.  
To clear the jam  
(1) Open the ADF Door.  
1
(2) Remove the jammed document.  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Cleaning the Document Scanning Area  
If the receiving party reports that the received documents were black, or contained black lines, try making a  
copy on your unit to verify. If the copy is black or has black lines, the document Scanning Area is probably  
dirty and must be cleaned.  
To clean the Scanning Area  
Open the ADF Door.  
1
ADF Door  
Wipe the Scanning Area gently with a soft  
cloth gauze wet with ethyl alcohol. Be sure to  
use a clean cloth, the scanning area can be  
easily scratched.  
2
Scanning Area  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Cleaning the Printer Roller  
If you find toner on the back of the recording paper, the printer roller in the fuser unit is probably dirty.  
To clean the Printer Rollers  
1:CLEAN ROLLER?  
3:PRINT ORDER FORM?  
1
7
8
* PRINTING *  
CLEANING CHARTS  
1
1
2
The machine will print out 3 Cleaning Charts.  
Then, return to standby.  
<PRINTER ROLLER CLEANING CHART>  
HOW TO LOAD THE CLEANING CHARTS  
1.REMOVE THE PAPER CASSETTE  
(If multiple cassette configuration, REMOVE THE UPPER PAPER CASSETTE)  
2.SET THESE 3 CLEANING CHARTS IN THE CASSETTE FACE DOWN  
3.RE-INSTALL THE PAPER CASSETTE  
4.PRESS [FUNCTION][7][8][SET][1][SET][2]  
TO START CLEANING  
5.DISPOSE OF THE CLEANING CHARTS  
*** SET THIS END TOWARDS THE FRONT, FACE DOWN ***  
Load the Cleaning Charts into the cassette face down.  
(See Note 1)  
3
4
1:CLEAN ROLLER?  
3:PRINT ORDER FORM?  
7
8
* CLEANING *  
PRINTER ROLLER  
1
2
5
The Machine will feed out the charts and clean the printer roller.  
1. If you have installed the optional cassette(s), load the Cleaning Charts into the upper cassette.  
NOTE  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Adjusting the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
If document misfeeding occurs frequently, we suggest you adjust the ADF.  
To adjust the ADF  
Slide the Pressure Adjusting Lever to the  
1
desired position depending on the condition.  
Position  
Condition  
To prevent no feed trouble  
1
2
3
Standard position  
To prevent multiple feed trouble  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Verification Stamp  
The Verification Stamp contains ink. When the stamp mark appears faded or hard to see, the stamp should  
be replaced or refilled with ink.  
To remove the stamp  
Open the ADF Door.  
1
ADF Door  
(1) Remove by pulling the Stamp Assembly  
2
upward.  
2
(2) Remove the Stamp. Replace the stamp  
with a new one.  
1. Please contact your local Panasonic dealer to purchase a new stamp. See page 242  
NOTE  
Verification Stamp for order number.  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Checking the Telephone Line  
When you do not hear a dial tone through the telephone connected to the machine or when the telephone  
does not ring (No automatic receive).  
Unplug the Telephone Line Cable from the  
1
telephone jack that was supplied by the  
telephone company.  
Plug a different regular telephone into the  
same telephone jack.  
2
3
Check for dial tone through the handset. If  
there is still no dial tone, report it to your local  
telephone company.  
or  
Call from another telephone to this number. If  
the telephone does not ring, report it to your  
local telephone company.  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Specifications  
Compatibility (G3 Fax)  
Compatibility (LAN)  
ITU-T Group 3  
IETF RFC 2305, ITU-T T.37  
Standard Compliance (LAN)  
Connector Interfaces (LAN)  
Communication Protocol (LAN)  
File Format (LAN)  
10Base-T Ethernet (IEEE 802.3), 100Base-TX Fast Ethernet (IEEE802.3u)  
10/100 Base-TX port: RJ-45  
TCP/IP, SMTP, POP3, MIME  
TIFF MH [IETF RFC 2301 Profile S], MMR (400 dpi only)  
PDF MH, MMR (400 dpi only) [when sending to PCs only]  
Email Receiving Width (LAN)  
Coding Scheme  
Modem Type  
Maximum size: LETTER  
MH, MR, MMR (Conforms to ITU-T Recommendations)  
ITU-T V.34, V.17, V.29, V.27ter and V.21  
33600 - 2400 bps  
Modem Speed  
Document Size  
Max. : 10.1 x 78.7 in (257 x 2000 mm)  
(with operator's assistance)  
Min. : 5.8 x 5.0 in (148 x 128 mm)  
Document Thickness  
Single page  
: 0.0024 - 0.0060 in (0.06 - 0.15 mm)  
Multiple pages : 0.0024 - 0.0039 in (0.06 - 0.10 mm)  
ADF Capacity  
Built-in, up to 50 Sheets  
(Automatic Document Feeder)  
Note : The document limitation to send multiple pages is as follows  
Document Size  
Up to 10.1 x 14.3 in  
(257 x 364 mm)  
A4 or Letter size  
Document Thickness  
0.0024 - 0.0048 in  
Up to 20 pages  
Up to 50 pages  
0.0024 - 0.0039 in  
* Please note that although the size and thickness meets the specifications, you  
might not be able to set 50 pages with some types of papers.  
Scanning Method  
Sheet Feeding with CCD type image sensor  
8.3 in (212 mm)  
Effective Scanning Width  
Scanner Resolution  
Horizontal  
Vertical  
Standard  
Fine  
203 pels/inch  
(8 pels/mm)  
203 pels/inch  
(8 pels/mm)  
406 pels/inch  
(16 pels/mm)  
(Interpolated)  
x
x
x
x
x
x
98 lines/inch  
(3.85 lines/mm)  
196 lines/inch  
(7.7 lines/mm)  
391 lines/inch  
(15.4 lines/mm)  
Super Fine  
Recording Method  
Recording Paper  
Laser printer  
Plain Paper  
Recording Paper Size  
Printer Resolution  
Letter, A4 or Legal  
Fax/Copy Mode : 406 x 391 dpi  
Printer Mode  
: 600 x 600 dpi  
300 x 300 dpi  
Effective Recording Size  
Letter  
A4  
Legal  
: 8.2 x 10.7 in (208 x 271 mm)  
: 8.0 x 11.4 in (202 x 289 mm)  
: 8.2 x 13.7 in (208 x 348 mm)  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Specifications  
Print Margin (See Note 1)  
0.16 in  
(4 mm)  
0.16 in  
(4 mm)  
0.16 in  
(4 mm)  
0.16 in  
(4 mm)  
Recording Paper Capacity  
Approx. 250 sheets (using 20 lb paper)  
One-Touch/Abbreviated Dialing  
Memory Capacity  
132 stations  
(including 28 One-Touch keys and 4 Program keys)  
Each station can register up to 36 digits for each telephone number (including  
pauses and spaces) and up to 15 characters for each station name.  
Manual Dialer  
70 stations  
(email address/telephone numbers)  
Image Memory Capacity  
Base Memory (4 MB)  
240 pages  
400 pages  
560 pages  
880 pages  
with 2 MB Flash Memory Card  
with 4 MB Flash Memory Card  
with 8 MB Flash Memory Card  
(Based on ITU-T Image No.1 using Standard Resolution)  
Continued on the next page...  
1. The left and right print margin is 0.22 in (5.5 mm) when printing a Letter or Legal size document  
with 600 dpi from a PC.  
NOTE  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications  
Power Supply  
108-132 VAC, 47-63 Hz, Single Phase  
Power Consumption  
Standby (Energy-Saver : On)  
Standby (Energy-Saver : Off)  
[Room temperature : 77°F (25°C)]  
Transmission  
Reception  
Copy  
Approx. 8.0 Wh  
Approx. 23.0 Wh  
Approx. 19.0 W  
Approx. 470 W  
Approx. 470 W  
Approx. 470 W  
Max  
Dimensions  
14.6 (W) x 18.0 (D) x 9.8 (H) in  
(370 x 457 x 250 mm)  
(excluding Projections and optional Paper Cassette)  
Weight  
Approx. 20 lb (Approx. 9.0 kg)  
(excluding consumable supplies and options)  
Operating Environment  
Temperature  
: 50 to 95°F (10 to 35°C)  
Relative Humidity : 15 to 70%  
US:BTLFA33BMGCS01-01  
3.3B  
FCC Registration Number  
Ringer Equivalence  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Recording Paper Specifications  
In general, most photocopy papers will also work very well. There are many "name" and "generic" brands of  
paper available. We recommend that you test various papers until you obtain the results you are looking for.  
The following table summarizes the major specifications to consider when selecting white or colored paper.  
2
Basic Weight  
16 to 24 lb (60 to 90 g/m )  
Cut with sharp blades, no visible frayed edges  
Long grain  
Cut Edge Conditions  
Grain  
Moisture Content  
Opacity  
3.7 to 5.3% by weight  
88% minimum  
Packing  
Polylaminated moisture-proof ream wrap  
Sizes  
Letter  
A4  
Legal  
: 8.5 x 11 in (216 x 279 mm)  
: 8.3 x 11.7 in (210 x 297 mm)  
: 8.5 x 14 in (216 x 356 mm)  
Type  
Cut sheet  
1. It is possible that the paper could meet all of the specifications listed above and still not print  
well because of the variations in paper manufacturing. Therefore, we recommend that you test  
the paper thoroughly before purchasing.  
NOTE  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Options and Supplies  
Please contact your local Panasonic dealer for availability.  
A. Options:  
Order No.  
Illustration  
Description  
UE-403176  
Handset Kit  
250 sheets Letter / Legal / A4 Size Paper Cassette with the  
Feeder Unit  
UE-409070  
UE-410046  
UE-410047  
UE-410048  
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 2 MB  
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB  
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 8 MB  
B. Supplies:  
Order No.  
Illustration  
Description  
DZHT000027  
Verification Stamp  
UG-5510  
Toner Cartridge  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Options and Supplies  
Installing the Flash Memory Card  
Before installing, make sure that there is no document file(s) stored in the memory. You may confirm by  
printing out a File List (See page 160). When the memory card is installed, the machine will initialize the  
document memory, all contents stored in the document memory at that time will be lost.  
(1) Unplug the Power Cord.  
1
Printer Cover  
(2) Open the Printer Cover and remove the  
Memory Card Cover.  
Memory Card Cover  
(1) Insert the Flash Memory Card gently into  
the card slot with the Panasonic logo  
facing to the outside of the machine.  
Caution: Installing the Memory Card(s) in  
the wrong direction may damage  
the connecting pins inside the  
machine.  
2
3
Memory Card  
(2) Re-install the Memory Card Cover and  
close the Printer Cover.  
Plug in the Power Cord. Print out the Fax  
Parameter List (See page 220) and confirm  
that the memory size on Fax Parameter No.  
1. The document(s) stored in memory will be lost if the memory card is removed.  
NOTE  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCC Notice for User in USA  
!
WARNING  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to  
part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,  
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
Operating Guide, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the  
user will be required to correct the interference at his/her own expense.  
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment would void the users authority to operate this  
device.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)  
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Responsible Party:  
FCC Inquiries Only:  
Matsushita Electric Corporation of America  
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094  
Panasonic Document Imaging Company/Technical Support Department  
Two Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094  
1-800-225-5329 (see Note below)  
Note: For Technical Support, please contact your Authorized Panasonic selling dealer.  
Ask your telephone company or installer to install the jack suitable for your device if such is not available.  
A FCC Compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is  
designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack that  
is Part 68 compliant.  
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and still  
have all of those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most, but not all areas, the sum of  
the REN 's of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of  
devices you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact your local telephone  
company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area.  
If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the Telephone Company may  
discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in advance. But if advance notice isn't  
practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with  
FCC.  
Your telephone company may make changes in it's facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that  
could affect the proper functioning of your equipment. If they do, you will be notified in advance to give you  
an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service.  
If you experience trouble with this telephone equipment, please contact the manufacturer's authorized  
service agency for information on obtaining service or repairs. The telephone company may ask that you  
disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that  
the equipment is not malfunctioning.  
The optional Handset Kit is hearing aid compatible.  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCC Notice for User in USA  
For protection against the risk of electric shock, always disconnect all cables from the wall outlet before  
servicing, modifying or installing the equipment.  
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company nor connected to party  
lines. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. (Contact the state public utility commission,  
public service commission or corporation commission for information.)  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or  
other electronic device to send any message via telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly  
contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of transmission the  
following information:  
1. Date and Time of transmission; and,  
2. Identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message: and,  
3. Telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual.  
In order to program this information into your facsimile machine, you should refer to page number 44 and 47  
in this Operating Instructions to complete the steps.  
Example of Header Format (LOGO, ID Number setting)  
MMM-dd-yyyy 09:00  
PANASONIC  
201 348 7000  
3) ID Number  
P.01/05  
1) Date and Time  
2) LOGO  
As an  
E
NERGY  
S
TAR® Partner, Panasonic has determined that this product  
TAR® guidelines for energy efficiency.  
meets the  
ENERGY  
S
This voluntary program specifies certain energy consumption and usage  
standards. This product will automatically "power down" after a specified  
period of non-use. The use of this  
reduce energy consumption and ultimately benefit the environment.  
E
NERGY  
S
TAR® compliant product will  
The default functions can be adjusted depending on your office requirements.  
Please ask your authorized Panasonic dealer for more details.  
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the rear panel of this equipment is  
a label that contains, among other information, the FCC Registration Number and Ringer  
Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment. You must, upon request, provide this  
information to your telephone company.  
NOTE  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice to User in Canada  
NOTICE  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of  
the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method  
of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent  
degradation of service in some situations.  
Repairs to this equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by  
supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may  
give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,  
telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution  
may be particularly important in rural areas.  
CAUTION  
!
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric  
inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.  
NOTICE  
This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications. This is  
confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that  
registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical  
specifications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment.  
On the rear panel of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the Registration  
Number and Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for thie equipment.  
The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals  
allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any  
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of  
all devices does not exceed five.  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice to User in Canada  
Avis  
Avant d'installer ce matériel, l'utilisateur doit s'assurer qu'il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de  
l'entreprise locale de télécommunication. Le matériel doit également être installé en suivant une méthode  
acceptée de raccordement. L'abonné ne doit pas oublier qu'il est possible que la conformité aux conditions  
énoncées ci-dessus n'empêche pas la dégradation du service dans certaines situations.  
Les réparations de matériel homologué doivent être effectuées par un centre d'entretien canadien autorisé  
désigné par le fournisseur. La compagnie de télécommunications peut demander à l'utilisateur de  
débrancher un appareil à la suite de réparations ou de modifications effectuées par l'utilisateur ou à cause  
de mauvais fonctionnement.  
Pour sa propre protection, l'utilisateur doit s'assurer que tous les fils de mise à la terre de la source  
d'énergie électrique, des lignes téléphoniques et des canalisations d'eau métalliques, s'il y en a, sont  
raccordé ensemble. Cette précaution est particulièrement importante dans les régions rurales.  
Avertissement  
!
L'utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-même; il doit avoir recours à un service  
d'inspection des installations électriques, ou à un électricien, selon le cas.  
Avis  
Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada applicables au matériel  
terminal. Cette conformité est confirmée par le numéro d’enregistrement. Le sigle IC, placé devant le  
numéro d’enregistrement, signifie que l’enregistrement s’est effectué conformément à une déclaration de  
conformité et indique que les spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada ont été respectées. Il n’implique  
pas qu’Industrie Canada a approuvé le materiel.  
Sur le panneau arrière de cet appareil se trouve une étiquette, sur laquelle est indiqué, entre autres, le  
numéro d’enregistrement et le Numéro d’Equivalence de Sonnerie (REN) pour cet appareil.  
L’IES assigné à chaque dispositif terminal indique le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être  
raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison  
quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de la sonnerie de tous  
les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
10Base-T/100Base-TX  
An Ethernet standard for cable.  
The 10/100 refers to its 10/100 Mbps bandwidth, the base to single channel baseband, and  
the T to the Twisted pair.  
The cable uses two pairs of unshielded twisted wires.  
ABBR. No. (Abbreviated The ability to store a full telephone number or email address into the dialer and then utilizing  
Number)  
a short series of keystrokes to speed dial that number in the future.  
Access Code  
A 4-digit programmable access code that prevents unauthorized operation of your Fax.  
The mechanism that delivers a stack of document pages to the scanner one page at a time.  
ADF (Automatic  
Document Feeder)  
Auto Print Reduction  
The method of automatically reducing a received document so that it can be printed onto a  
standard size piece of plain paper. For example, your machine will reduce an incoming legal  
size page to 75% of its original size so it could fit on a letter size page.  
Automatic Reception  
BPS (Bits Per Second)  
The mode that allows you to receive fax documents without user intervention.  
The amount of data that is transmitted over the phone line. Your machine can start at each  
Max. Modem speed and automatically steps down to suitable speed depending on the phone  
line condition and the receiving machines capabilities.  
CCITT  
Consultative Committee on International Telegraph and Telephone. This organization has  
presently developed four groups of industry standards that insure facsimile compatibility.  
Character ID  
A programmed proprietary code name that allows up to 16 alphanumeric characters  
identifying your machine.  
Character Keys  
Client  
The keys that are used to enter letters and symbols for various programming functions.  
Clients are computers that run software programs used to contact and obtain data from  
Server software program on another computer, often across a great distance.  
Coding Scheme  
Comm. Journal  
Contrast  
The data compression method used by machines. Your machine utilizes Modified Huffman  
(MH), Modified Read (MR) and Modified Modified Read (MMR) coding schemes.  
Refers to either the Communication Journal, Relay Transmission Report, or the Confidential  
XMT Report.  
Signifies the scanning sensitivity in terms of lightness and darkness of your original  
transmitting pages.  
Cover Sheet  
A Fax Cover Sheet can be attached to your transmit document(s) that shows the recipient's  
name, originator's name and number of pages attached.  
DDD (Direct Distance  
Dialing)  
A telephone service that allows unassisted dialing, no operator assistance is required.  
Default Gateway IP  
Address  
This is your Gateway's Address, it is used by other Networks to determine which route to take  
when communicating with your Internet Fax.  
Deferred Polling  
The ability to retrieve documents from other stations at a later time.  
Deferred Transmission The ability to send documents to other stations at a later time.  
Delivery Notice  
Delivery Notice is a Message Disposition Notification (MDN) request initiated by the sending  
IFax to the destination IFax. The receiving IFax replies with a delivery processing  
confirmation after the message (email) was read.  
Direct Dialing  
Direct SMTP  
The method of dialing where you enter the entire telephone numbrer or email address  
through the keypad.  
Allows IFax machines to communicate directly with each other within the Firewall (Intranet)  
without going through the Mail Server, thus alleviating the burden on the mail server.  
Directory Search Dialing Allows you to dial a full telephone number or email address by searching the station's name  
entered in the One-Touch keys or Abbreviated dialing numbers.  
Directory Sheet  
Domain Name  
The list that contains the station names that are programmed into your unit.  
A unique name that identifies an Internet site.  
Domain Names always have 2 or more parts, separated by dots.  
The part on the left is the most specific, and the part on the right is the most general.  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi- Dialing method that sends a different set of frequencies for each digit of the telephone  
Frequency)  
keypad. Commonly refers to touch tone dialing.  
ECM (Error Correction  
Mode)  
The ability to correct transmission errors as detected during the transmitting phone call.  
Email Address  
The address for sending and receiving data by email. It consists of User name, Sub-domain  
name and Domain name.  
End Receiving Station  
Energy-Saver Mode  
In a relay network, the final station designated to receive the document.  
Saves energy by consuming less power than when in standby mode by turning off the fuser  
unit after the specified time.  
Ethernet  
FCC  
A very common method of networking computers and equipment in a LAN.  
Ethernet can handle up to 100 Mbps and can be used with almost any kind of computer.  
Federal Communications Commission. The U.S. Government organization that regulates  
communications originating or terminating in the United States.  
FAX Forward  
The ability to forward all incoming faxes to the registered station in the specified ABBR No.  
FAX Parameter List  
The list that contains the home FAX parameters settings that you have programmed into your  
machine.  
FAX/TEL Auto Switching The ability to share a single telephone line for both fax and voice usage.  
File  
A task that has been stored into the memory of your unit. Examples are deferred  
transactions.  
Fixed Print Reduction  
The method that allows you to determine one reduction rate, such as 75%, for all incoming  
documents.  
Function  
The control panel key that will be utilized to begin an operation or configuration of a feature.  
Refers to the standards and transmission capabilities of the current generation of machines.  
G3 Mode (Group 3)  
Group Dialing  
The ability to program many telephone numbers into a single station so that many locations  
can be dialed in sequence utilizing a single keystroke.  
Halftone  
A scanning technique to distinguish levels of gray from black and white. Your machine can  
detect up to 64 levels of gray in halftone mode.  
Handshaking  
Header  
The exchange of a group of control signals that communicate between the transmitter and  
receiver. These signals determine the condition at which communication can occur.  
A row of information that is transmitted by the sending machine and printed on the top of  
each page by the receiving unit. This identifies the transmitting unit and information about  
the transmission, such as time and date.  
Home Page  
Host  
The page that your Browser displays when it starts up or the main web page for a business,  
organization, etc.  
Any computer on a network that is a repository for services available to other computers on  
the network.  
A Host must have a unique Host name within a domain.  
The host is the first (left most) section of the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN).  
The remainder of the FQDN is the domain and often tells you something about where your  
machine is located (i.e., at Panasonic).  
Example:  
Your machine's email address is: [email protected]  
In the example above "fax01" is the host and "panasonic.com" is the domain.  
ID  
A programmable address of up to 20 digits identifying your machine.  
Image Memory Capacity This signifies the amount of memory available in your unit capable of storing pages of  
documents. All page units of measure are based on the ITU-T Image No.1.  
Individual Transmission A report that is printed by the transmitting unit stating information regarding the last document  
Journal  
transaction.  
Industry Canada (DOC) Department of Communications. The Canadian Government organization that regulates  
communications originating or terminating in Canada.  
Continued on the next page...  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Information Code  
Information Code  
A code that is internally generated by your Fax stating a specific operational error or machine  
failure.  
A code that is internally generated by your Fax stating a specific operational error or machine  
failure.  
Initial Sending Station  
Internet  
In a relay network, the station that is originating the document transmission.  
The vast collection of inter-connected networks that all use the TCP/IP protocols. The  
Internet connects independent networks into a vast global internet.  
Intranet  
A private network inside a company or organization that uses the same kinds of software that  
you would find on the public Internet, but that is only for internal use.  
IP Address  
A unique number used to identify equipment or host computers on the Internet.  
An institution that provides access to the Internet in some form, usually for money.  
ISP (Internet Service  
Provider)  
ITU-T  
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication, formerly known as C.C.I.T.T.  
ITU-T Image No. 1  
An industry standard document that allows comparisons of the transmission speeds and  
capabilities of machines.  
Journal  
Keypad  
A report that is printed by your unit listing the last 32 transactions.  
A group of numeric keys located on your control panel.  
LAN (Local Area  
Network)  
A computer network system and printer limited to an immediate area, such as an Office,  
Factory, and University used to integrate and exchange data.  
LCD  
Liquid Crystal Display. The display area of your machine.  
LDAP  
Lightweight Directory Acces Protocol (LDAP) is a directory service protocol that runs over  
TCP/IP.  
LOGO  
Your programmed company name or identification up to 25 alphanumeric characters.  
MAC Address  
Its the hardware address, often referred to as MAC (Media Access Control) address that is  
assigned to the equipment. MAC address is hard-coded and is not configurable.  
The MAC address consists of 6 hexadecimal numbers separated by colons.  
Example: 00:00:c0:34:f1:50  
Mail Gateway IP  
Address  
The Address of the Mail Server.  
The Internet Fax communicates with your existing Mail Server for all communication traffic.  
Mailing List  
A system that allows people to send an email to one address, whereupon their message is  
conveyed to multiple subscribers on the Mailing List.  
Manual Reception  
MAPI  
A mode that requires operator intervention to receive an incoming document.  
Acronym for Message Application Programming Interface.  
A standard Windows interface for messaging that enables different mail programs and other  
mail-aware applications like word processors and spreadsheets to exchange messages and  
attachments with each other.  
MDN  
This Message Disposition Notification (MDN) is requested by the sender for a delivery  
processing confirmation indicating that the message (email) was read.  
Memory Transmission  
The documents are scanned into memory before actual connection to the phone line for  
transmission.  
MIME (Multi-purpose  
A standard used for attaching non-text (image) files to Internet email messages.  
Internet Mail Extension)  
Modem  
A device that converts signals from your fax machine into signals that can be transmitted  
over telephone lines.  
Multi-Station  
Transmission  
The ability to broadcast the same set of documents to a programmed number of locations.  
Multiple Logo  
The user can select one of 25 preset LOGOs before a transmission.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Network  
Any time you connect 2 or more computers together so that they can share resources, you  
have a computer network.  
Connect 2 or more networks together and you have an internet.  
Network Address  
Network Password  
An individual 4-digit addressing number assigned to a One-Touch/ Abbreviated number that  
identifies a particular station in a relay network.  
A 4-digit password assigned to a network address to prevent unauthorized stations from  
accessing a relay station.  
Off-hook Dialing  
On-hook Dialing  
One-Touch Dialing  
Overlap Printing  
The direct dialing of a telephone number with the handset out of the cradle or "off the hook."  
The direct dialing of a telephone number with the handset in the cradle or "on the hook."  
The ability to dial an entire telephone number by pressing one key.  
Documents too long to be reduced are automatically printed on two pages with approximately  
10 mm overlap.  
Panasonic Super  
Smoothing  
An electronic image enhancement (Panasonic Super Smoothing) that will create a particular  
pattern for the improvement of copy quality.  
PDF  
Adobe® Portable Document Format (PDF) is a universal file format that preserves all the  
fonts, formatting, graphics, and color of any source document, regardless of the application  
and platform used to create it.  
Polling  
The ability to retrieve a document from another machine.  
Polling Password  
A 4-digit programmed code that enables the security of a document being polled.  
POP (Post Office  
Protocol)  
POP refers to the way email software such as Eudora or your machine gets email from a mail  
server.  
You must always have a POP account that you tell your email software to use to retrieve your  
mail.  
Power Saver Mode  
Print Collation  
To reduce the power consumption of the machine in standby, select the time period to turn  
OFF the high temperature fuser unit when the printer is idle.  
The ability to stack received documents in the correct order.  
Print Reduction Modes The methods used to determine how an incoming document will be reduced to print onto the  
paper loaded in your machine.  
Program Keys  
Protocol  
Keys that are defined for storing a sequence of stations to be dialed or polled.  
A protocol is the special set of rules for communicating that the end points in a  
telecommunication connection use when they send signals back and forth. Both end points  
must recognize and observe the protocol.  
PSTN  
Public Switched Telephone Network. Network of interconnected switching equipment and  
transmission facilities.  
Receiving Password  
Relay Address  
Relay Network  
Relay Station  
A 4-digit password that is checked before a document is received.  
A 3-digit code that identifies your machine is programmed in a relay network.  
A group of machines that communicate via a relay station.  
A certain type of machine that can store and forward documents to an end receiving station  
and/or a relay station in another relay network.  
Your machine can not be used as a relay station.  
Relayed Transmission  
Sending a document to a relay station, which in turn, sends the document to the end  
receiving station.  
Relayed Transmission  
Report  
A report that contains information regarding the last document transmission to a relay station.  
Resolution  
Relates to the number of dots scanned or printed per certain square. The quality of the  
image increases as the number of dots per certain square increases.  
Continued on the next page...  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Router (Gateway)  
A special purpose computer (or software package) that handles the connection between 2 or  
more networks.  
Gateways act like traffic cops, they spend their time looking at the destination addresses of  
the packets passing through them and deciding which route to send them on.  
Selective Reception  
Sender Selection  
Server  
A function that can be set so that your unit will receive from only those machines  
programmed into your dialer.  
The user can select one of 24 pre-programmed sender’s name and email address/telephone  
number before each transmission.  
A computer, or a software package, that provides a specific kind of service to client software  
running on other computers.  
A single server machine could have several different server software packages running on it,  
thus providing many different servers to clients on the network.  
Sleep Mode  
The lowest power state that the machine enters after the specified time without actually  
turning off.  
SMTP (Simple Mail  
Transfer Protocol)  
This is the main communication protocol used to send and receive email on the Internet.  
Station Name  
Alphanumeric ID which can be programmed for each One-Touch dialing and Abbreviated  
dialing number.  
Stored Documents  
Sub-address  
Documents that have been scanned and now are stored in your machine's memory.  
ITU-T recommendation for further routing, forwarding or relaying of incoming faxes.  
Sub-address Password ITU-T recommendation for additional security that corresponds to the Sub-address.  
Subnet Mask  
A mask bit used to manage sub-segments of the network which is defined with network IDs.  
Substitute Memory  
Reception  
Your machine's ability to store an incoming document into its memory, when it runs out of  
recording paper or toner.  
A capability of your unit to be connected and operate with a Telephone Answering Machine  
(TAM).  
TAM Interface  
TCP/IP (Transmission  
Control Protocol/  
Internet Protocol)  
TCP/IP is a suite of protocols used to connect to the Internet and wide-area networks.  
TIFF Image Viewer  
An application software to view the contents of TIFF-F File.  
Some TIFF Image Viewers may not display the data properly.  
TIFF-F (Tagged Image  
File Format)  
An image file format for attachments of graphic data for smooth transmission between  
different units.  
The coding method of this format supports the same coding as Modified Huffman (MH) and  
multiple-page image data.  
Transmission Password A 4-digit password that is checked when a document is transmitted.  
Transmission  
Reservation  
The ability to preset a telephone number so that you may reserve a transmission while your  
unit is performing another function.  
User Parameter  
Programmed parameters that provide information to other stations. Examples are logo,  
character ID, date and time.  
Verification Stamp  
View Mode - File List  
View Mode - Journal  
A user selectable transmission verification stamp can be placed on scanned documents that  
are successfully transmitted or stored in memory.  
Allows you to view the brief contents of the memory files through the LCD display without  
having to print the Memory File List.  
Allows you to view the brief contents of the journal through the LCD display without having to  
print the journal.  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITU-T Image No. 1  
All specifications are based on the ITU-T Image No. 1 (The sample shown below is not to scale).  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
A
Email Address .....................................................74  
Email Character Set ............................................83  
Email Header Format ..........................................83  
ABBR. Dialing Number ........................................72  
ABBR. Number List............................................217  
Abbreviated Dialing................................... 109, 114  
Abbreviated Email Addressing.............................94  
Access Code......................................................168  
ADF Capacity.....................................................238  
Adjusting the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) ..  
APOP Authentication ...........................................85  
Auto Dialer ..............................................60, 61, 70  
Auto Dialing Number............................................74  
Automatic Document Feeder ...............................87  
Automatic Reduction..........................................133  
F
Fax / Tel Auto Switching Mode..........................130  
Fax Forward ......................................................177  
Fax Mode...........................................................131  
Fax Parameter List ............................................220  
Fax Parameter Table...........................................79  
FCC Registration Number .................................240  
File List ..............................................................160  
Fixed Reduction.................................................133  
Function Key List.................................................12  
G
B
Group Dialing.....................................................142  
Backup.......................................................... 54, 64  
H
C
Header Format ....................................................79  
Header Print ........................................................79  
Character ID.........................................................46  
Cleaning the Document Scanning Area.............233  
Cleaning the Printer Roller.................................234  
Communication Journal (Comm. Journal) .. 90, 214  
Confidential Mailbox...........................................200  
Contrast ...............................................................88  
Control Panel .......................................................14  
Copy...................................................................136  
Cover Sheet.......................................................173  
I
ID Number ...........................................................47  
Ifax Return Receipt............................................178  
Image Memory Capacity....................................239  
Inbound Routing ..........................................24, 156  
Incomplete File Save...........................................80  
Individual Transmission Journal ........................211  
Information Codes .............................................226  
Internet Communication ......................................21  
Internet Parameters.........................................2, 48  
Internet Relay Station........................................184  
ITU-T Image No. 1.............................................253  
D
Date and Time .....................................................44  
Deferred Polling .................................................138  
Deferred Transmission.......................................137  
Delivery Notice...................................................102  
Delivery Notice (Home)........................................85  
DHCP Client.........................................................84  
Diagnostic Password ...........................................82  
Dialing Method (Tone or Pulse) .................... 42, 79  
Dimensions ........................................................240  
Direct IFax XMT...................................................85  
Direct Transmission ...........................................112  
Direct Transmission Reservation.......................119  
Directory Search Dialing .....................95, 110, 115  
Directory Sheet ....................................................77  
Distinctive Ring Detector (DRD) ........................172  
DNS Server..........................................................84  
Document Jam...................................................232  
Document Size...................................................238  
Document Thickness .........................................238  
J
Journal.........................................................68, 210  
K
Key/Buzzer Volume.............................................79  
L
LAN Interface.......................................................49  
LDAP ...................................................................20  
Loading Documents.............................................86  
Logo.....................................................................45  
M
Mailing List.........................................................104  
Manual Email Addressing....................................92  
Manual Number Dialing.............................108, 112  
Memory Card.....................................................243  
Memory Transmission .......................................106  
E
Edit File Mode....................................................160  
Email ABBR Programming Errors......................229  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Memory Transmission Reservation ............ 98, 118  
Monitor Volume....................................................43  
Multi-Station Transmission (Broadcasting) . 97, 111  
Relayed Transmission .......................................181  
Resolution............................................................88  
Retry an Incomplete File....................................167  
Returned Email..................................................103  
Ringer Equivalence ...........................................240  
Ringer Volume.....................................................43  
N
Network Printer ....................................................26  
Network Scanner ........................................ 25, 179  
S
O
Scanner Resolution ...........................................238  
Selectable Domains...........................................100  
Selective Reception...........................................194  
Sender Selection ...............................................150  
Sender Selection List.........................................153  
Sending Documents via LAN...............................91  
SMTP Authentication...........................................84  
SMTP Mail Server ...............................................17  
Sub-Address Password.......................................82  
Sub-Addressing.................................................207  
Subject Line Entry .............................................154  
Substitute Memory Reception ...........................135  
Off-Hook Dialing.................................................116  
One-Touch Dialing.................................... 109, 113  
One-Touch Email Addressing..............................93  
One-Touch Key....................................................70  
One-Touch List ..................................................217  
One-Touch/ABBR. No..........................................62  
On-Hook Dialing.................................................117  
Operating Environment......................................240  
Overlap Printing .................................................134  
P
Paper Specifications ..........................................241  
Password Reception..........................................197  
Password Transmission.....................................196  
Pause...................................................................14  
PIN Code ...........................................................175  
Polling ................................................................139  
Polling Password ...............................................139  
POP Access Key....................................... 147, 148  
POP Parameters................................................125  
POP Server........................................................125  
POP3 Client .........................................................18  
Power Consumption...........................................240  
Pre Installation Information ..................................16  
Print Collation.....................................................135  
Print Margin........................................................239  
Print Reduction ..................................................133  
Print Reduction Ratio.........................................133  
Priority Transmission Reservation .....................119  
Program Keys ....................................................142  
Program List.......................................................219  
Programming or Retrieving Parameters ..............51  
T
TAM Interface Mode..........................................131  
Telephone Mode................................................129  
Toner Cartridge ...................................................34  
Toner Cartridge Order Forms............................221  
Transaction Journal.....................................84, 210  
Transmission Password ....................................196  
Transmission Reservation .................................118  
U
User Parameters .................................................44  
V
Verification Stamp .......................................89, 236  
Viewing Mode File List.......................................161  
W
Weight ...............................................................240  
R
Receive To Memory...........................................170  
Received Time Print.............................................79  
Receiving Documents via LAN ..........................123  
Receiving Email from a POP Server..................125  
Receiving Password ..........................................197  
Reception Modes...............................................128  
Recording Paper Jam ........................................231  
Redialing............................................................121  
Reduction Ratio ...................................................80  
Relay Network....................................................182  
Relay XMT Report (Comm. Journal)..................192  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U.S.A. Only  
WARRANTY  
PANASONIC DIGITAL DOCUMENT COMPANY MAKES NO WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES OR  
REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, TO THE CUSTOMER WITH RESPECT TO THIS  
PANASONIC MACHINE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
PANASONIC DIGITAL DOCUMENT COMPANY ASSUMES NO RISK AND SHALL NOT BE SUBJECT  
TO LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO DIRECT, INDIRECT,  
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS OF PROFITS SUSTAINED BY  
THE CUSTOMER IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR APPLICATION OF THIS PANASONIC  
MACHINE. SEE YOUR DEALER FOR DETAILS OF DEALER’S WARRANTY.  
For Service, Call:  
Panasonic Digital Document Company  
Unit of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America  
Two Panasonic Way  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga,  
Ontario L4W 2T3  
Secaucus, New Jersey 07094  
M030-3033  
DZSD001613-3  
March 2003  
Printed in Japan  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Multiquip Power Roller T16 User Manual
NEC Indoor Furnishings NP40CM User Manual
NewAir Air Conditioner AC 10000E User Manual
Niles Audio Home Theater System DS00420ACN User Manual
Nilfisk ALTO Vacuum Cleaner FLOORTEC 560 P User Manual
Nortel Networks Telephone NN10042 116 User Manual
NuTone Fan PFMB User Manual
Oregon Scientific Watch RX109 User Manual
Panasonic Camera Lens HX025 User Manual
Panasonic Cordless Telephone KX TG6811SA User Manual